24p2909
Hardware Maintenance Manual
xSeries 250
IBM
Hardware Maintenance Manual
xSeries 250
IBM
Note:
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general
information under “Notices” on page 215.
First Edition (March 2001)
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time.
This publication was developed for products and services offered in the United States of America. IBM may not offer the
products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries, and the information is subject to change
without notice. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products, services, and features available in
your area.
Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1999. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with
IBM Corp.
About this manual
This manual contains diagnostic information, a Symptom-to-FRU index, service
information, error codes, error messages, and configuration information for the IBM®
xSeries 250, Models 6RY, 7RY, 8RY, 61Y, 71Y, 81Y.
Important: This manual is intended for trained servicers who are familiar with IBM
PC Server products.
Important safety information
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this book before performing any
of the instructions.
Leia todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo antes de executar qualquer operação.
Prenez connaissance de toutes les consignes de type Attention et
Danger avant de procéder aux opérations décrites par les instructions.
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise, bevor Sie eine Anweisung ausführen.
Accertarsi di leggere tutti gli avvisi di attenzione e di pericolo prima di effettuare
qualsiasi operazione.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
iii
Lea atentamente todas las declaraciones de precaución y peligro ante de llevar a cabo
cualquier operación.
Online support
Use the World Wide Web (WWW) to download Diagnostic, BIOS Flash, and Device
Driver files.
File download address is:
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/files.html
IBM online addresses
The HMM manuals online address is:
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/cdt/hmm.html
The IBM PC Company Support Page is:
http://www.us.pc.ibm.com/support/index.html
The IBM PC Company Home Page is:
http://www.pc.ibm.com
iv
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Contents
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Important safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Online support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
IBM online addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
General checkout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Choices available from the Configuration/Setup main
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Power-on password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Administrator password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the SCSISelect utility program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Starting the SCSISelect utility program . . . . . . . . . . 51
Choices available from the SCSISelect menu . . . . . 51
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Features and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Server features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Reliability, availability, and serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Information LED panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Diagnostic tools overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
POST beep codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
POST error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Event/error logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Small computer system interface messages . . . . . . . . . 14
Solving ServeRAID problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ServeRAID controller messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ServeRAID startup messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ServeRAID ISPR, BCS, and ECS POST error codes .
19
Rebuilding a defunct drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Steps for recovering from defunct drives . . . . . . 24
Rebuilding a hot-swap drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recovering from an incomplete format of a physical
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recovering from a failure in a failover-environment 25
Replacing a non-hot-plug controller in a failover pair .
25
Diagnostic programs and error messages . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Starting the diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Viewing the test log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Diagnostic error message tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Diagnostic panel LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Temperature checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recovering BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Diagnosing errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller. . . . . . . . . . 35
Network connection problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Ethernet controller troubleshooting chart. . . . . . 36
Ethernet controller messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare server ODI driver
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) driver messages . . . . . 40
UNIX messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Configuring the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility program . . . . 45
Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program 45
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
Installing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Major components of the xSeries 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Component locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
I/O board component locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Processor board component locations. . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Processor board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Processor board connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Processor board jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Memory board component locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Memory board connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Memory board LED locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Working inside the server with the power on . . . . . 59
Removing the server top cover and bezel . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Removing the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Removing the media-bay bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Removing the front trim bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Working with adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Adapter considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Installing a hot-plug adapter (slots 3 through 6) . . . 62
Installing a non-hot-plug PCI adapter (slots 1 and 2). .
64
Cabling example for the ServeRAID adapter . . . . . . . . 66
LVD SCSI backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
LVD SCSI backplane removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
SCSI repeater card installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Installing internal drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Internal drive bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Installing a 5.25-inch removable-media drive . . . . . 82
Installing memory-module kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Installing a microprocessor kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Installing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Replacing a hot-swap fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Completing the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Installing the front trim bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Installing the media-bay bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Installing the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Reconfiguring the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Connecting external options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Input/output ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Parallel port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Viewing or changing the parallel-port assignments
94
Parallel port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Video port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Keyboard port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Auxiliary-device (pointing device) port . . . . . . . . . . 97
Ultra2 (LVD) SCSI ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
SCSI cabling requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Setting SCSI IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
SCSI connector pin-number assignments . . . . . . 98
Serial ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
v
Viewing or changing the serial-port assignments 99
Serial-port connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Universal Serial Bus ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
USB cables and hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
USB-port connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Ethernet port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Configuring the Ethernet controller. . . . . . . . . . 101
Failover for redundant Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Ethernet port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Advanced System Management ports . . . . . . . . . . 104
Cabling the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Installing the server in a rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
FRU information (service only). . . . . . . . 107
Diagnostic switch card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting the shuttle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front LED card assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Legacy board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory card removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI switch card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power backplane assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor/PCI backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
108
108
109
110
112
112
113
115
Using IBM ServeRAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Understanding RAID technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Stripe-unit size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Supported RAID levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Understanding RAID level-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Understanding RAID Level-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Understanding RAID Level-1 Enhanced . . . . . 120
Understanding RAID Level-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Understanding RAID Level-5 Enhanced . . . . . 123
Selecting a RAID level and performance tuning 125
Drive state descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Physical drive state descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Logical drive state descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Configuring controllers using the ServeRAID Manager
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Using the ServeRAID Manager program interface 127
Using utility programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Using FlashMan, the IBM ServeRAID ROM Update
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Using the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration program . .
130
Viewing the controller status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Viewing the configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Using the advanced configuration functions . . 132
Running the IPSSEND program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Using the IPSSEND program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Server roll-out functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
vi
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Error-recovery functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem-isolation and debug commands . . . . .
RAID Configuration commands. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the IPSMON program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the IPSMON program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
136
139
140
141
Symptom-to-FRU index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Beep symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No beep symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply LED errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error procedures . . . . . . .
ServeRAID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power related system shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature related system shutdown. . . . . . . . . .
DASD checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Built-In Self Test (BIST) checkout. . . . . . . . . . . . .
I2C bus fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undetermined problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
146
146
148
153
154
155
161
162
164
165
166
166
167
168
168
168
169
169
169
170
Parts listing (Type 8665) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Part A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
174
175
176
177
178
Related service information . . . . . . . . . . 179
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety inspection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices
Grounding requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety notices (multi-lingual translations) . . . . . . .
Send us your comments! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem determination tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
180
180
180
182
183
183
183
214
215
215
216
General checkout
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read-only memory (ROM)
on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of the server: The system board, Ethernet controller, video controller,
RAM, keyboard, mouse (pointing device), diskette drive, serial ports, hard drives,
and parallel port. You can also use them to test some external devices. See
“Diagnostic programs and error messages” on page 25.
Also, if you cannot determine whether a problem is caused by the hardware or by the
software, you can run the diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is
working properly.
When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause several error
messages. When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the first error message.
After the cause of the first error message is corrected, the other error messages might
not occur the next time you run the test.
A failed system might be part of a shared DASD cluster (two or more systems sharing
the same external storage device(s)). Prior to running diagnostics, verify that the
failing system is not part of a shared DASD cluster.
A system might be part of a cluster if:
•
The customer identifies the system as part of a cluster.
•
One or more external storage units are attached to the system and at least one of
the attached storage units is additionally attached to another system or
unidentifiable source.
•
One or more systems are located near the failing system.
If the failing system is suspected to be part of a shared DASD cluster, all diagnostic
tests can be run except diagnostic tests which test the storage unit (DASD residing in
the storage unit) or the storage adapter attached to the storage unit.
Notes:
1.
For systems that are part of a shared DASD cluster, run one test at a time in
looped mode. Do not run all tests in looped mode, as this could enable the DASD
diagnostic tests.
2.
If multiple error codes are displayed, diagnose the first error code displayed.
3.
If the computer hangs with a POST error, go to the “Symptom-to-FRU index” on
page 143.
4.
If the computer hangs and no error is displayed, go to “Undetermined problems”
on page 170.
5.
Power supply problems, see “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 143.
6.
Safety information, see “Safety information” on page 180.
7.
For intermittent problems, check the error log; see “POST error messages” on
page 14.
1.
IS THE SYSTEM PART OF A CLUSTER?
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
1
YES. Schedule maintenance with the customer. Shut down all systems related to the
cluster. Run storage test.
NO. Go to step 2.
2.
THE SYSTEM IS NOT PART OF A CLUSTER.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.
Power-off the computer and all external devices.
Check all cables and power cords.
Set all display controls to the middle position.
Power-on all external devices.
Power-on the computer.
Record any POST error messages displayed on the screen. If an error is
displayed, look up the first error in the “POST error codes” on page 155.
Check the information LED panel System Error LED; if on, see “Diagnostic
panel LEDs” on page 146.
Check the System Error Log. If an error was recorded by the system, see
“Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 143.
Start the Diagnostic Programs. See “Diagnostic programs and error
messages” on page 25.
Check for the following responses:
a.
One beep.
b.
Readable instructions or the Main Menu.
DID YOU RECEIVE BOTH OF THE CORRECT RESPONSES?
NO. Find the failure symptom in “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 143.
YES. Run the Diagnostic Programs. If necessary, refer to “Diagnostic programs and
error messages” on page 25.
If you receive an error, go to “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 143.
If the diagnostics completed successfully and you still suspect a problem, see
“Undetermined problems” on page 170.
2
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
General information
The IBM xSeries 250 server is a high-performance server with the capability of
microprocessor upgrade to a symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) server. It is ideally
suited for networking environments that require superior microprocessor
performance, efficient memory management, flexibility, and large amounts of reliable
data storage.
Performance, ease of use, reliability, and expansion capabilities were key
considerations during the design of the server. These design features make it possible
for you to customize the system hardware to meet your needs today, while providing
flexible expansion capabilities for the future.
The xSeries 250 server comes with a three-year limited warranty and 90-Day IBM
Start Up Support. If you have access to the World Wide Web, you can obtain up-todate information about the server model and other IBM server products at the
following World Wide Web address: http://www.ibm.com/eserver/xseries
Features and specifications
The following provides a summary of the features and specifications for the xSeries
250 server.
•
Microprocessor:
—
—
—
—
•
Intel® Pentium®III Xeon™
32 KB of level-1 cache
1 MB of Level-2 cache (min.)
Expandable to four microprocessors
Memory:
— Maximum: 16GB
— Type: ECC, SDRAM, Registered DIMMs
— Slots: 4-way interleaved, 16 slots
•
Drives standard:
— Diskette: 1.44 MB
— CD-ROM: IDE
•
Expansion bays:
— Hot-swap: 10 slim high
— Non-hot-swap: Two 5.25-inch
•
LVD SCSI Backplane:
— Ultra160 capable
— Two SCSI channels, each with five connectors, in a split configuration
— Supports a maximum of 10 slim-high hard disk drives
•
PCI expansion slots:
— Four 33 MHz 64-bit hot-plug
— Two 66 MHz 64-bit non-hot-plug
•
Hot-swap power supplies:
250 W (115-230 V ac)
— Minimum: Two
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
3
— Maximum: Four
— Three for redundancy
•
Redundant cooling:
— Four hot-swap fan assemblies
•
Video:
— S3 video controller
— Compatible with SVGA and VGA
— 4 MB video memory
•
Size
—
—
—
—
•
Integrated functions:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
Height: 356 mm (14 in.)
Depth: 650 mm (25.6 in.)
Width: 440 mm (17.3 in.)
Weight: 34.4 kg (76 lb.) to 61 kg (134 lb.) depending upon configuration
Advanced System Management processor
Dual Ultra-2 (LVD) SCSI controller, one external port, one internal port
One 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX AMD Ethernet controller
Two serial ports
One parallel port
Two Universal Serial Bus ports
Keyboard port
Mouse port
Video port
One management port
Two Advanced System Management Interconnect ports
Acoustical noise emissions:
— Sound power, idling: 6.3 bel maximum
— Sound power, operating: 6.3 bel maximum
— Sound pressure, idle: 49 dBa maximum
— Sound pressure, operating: 49 dBa maximum
•
Environment:
— Air temperature:
–
–
Server on: 10º to 35º C (50º to 95º F). Altitude: 0 to 914 m (3000 ft.)
Server on: 10º to 32º C (50º to 89.6º F). Altitude: 914 m (3000 ft.) to 2133 m
(7000 ft.)
– Server off: 10º to 43º C (50º to 110º F). Maximum altitude: 2133 m (7000 ft.)
— Humidity:
–
–
•
Server on: 8% to 80%
Server off: 8% to 80%
Heat output:
Approximate heat output in British Thermal Units (BTU) per hour:
— Minimum configuration:1023.9 BTU
— Maximum configuration: 2764.6 BTU
•
Electrical input:
— Sine-wave input (50-60 Hz) required
— Input voltage low range:
4
–
Minimum: 90 V ac
–
Maximum: 137 V ac
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
— Input voltage high range:
–
Minimum: 180 V ac
– Maximum: 265 V ac
— Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA) approximately:
–
Minimum: 0.08 kVA
–
Maximum: 0.52 kVA
Server features
The unique design of the server takes advantage of advancements in symmetric
multiprocessing (SMP), data storage, and memory protection. The server combines:
•
Impressive performance using an innovative approach to SMP
The server supports up to four Pentium III Xeon microprocessors. The server
comes with one microprocessor installed; you can install additional
microprocessors to enhance performance and provide SMP capability.
•
Integrated disk-array subsystem (optional)
Although many operating systems provide software fault tolerance through
mirroring, IBM provides hardware fault tolerance through the redundant array of
independent disks (RAID) controller. The IBM ServeRAID™ controller is a
standard feature. It provides three channels and supports RAID levels 0, 1, 1E, 5,
and 5E.
•
Large data-storage and hot-swap capabilities
All models of the server support up to 10 slim-high disk drives. The hot-swap
feature enables you to remove and replace hard disk drives without turning off
the server.
•
Hot-plug PCI adapter capabilities
The server has four hot-plug slots for PCI adapters. With operating system
support, you can replace failing hot-plug PCI adapters without turning off the
server. If the hot-add feature is supported by the operating system and the PCI
adapter, you can also add PCI adapters in these slots without turning off the
server.
•
Redundant cooling and power capabilities
The redundant cooling and hot-swap capabilities of the fans in the server enable
continued operation if one of the fans fails, because you can replace a failing fan
without turning off the server.
The server comes standard with three 250-watt power supplies, which support
redundancy for a typical configuration. You can install one additional power
supply.
•
Large system memory
The memory bus in the server supports up to 16 GB of system memory. The
memory controller provides error correcting code (ECC) support for up to 16
industry-standard, 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, registered, dual inline memory modules
(DIMMs). The memory controller also provides Chipkill™ memory protection.
Chipkill memory protection is a technology that protects the system from
component failure on a DIMM.
•
System-management capabilities
The server comes with a Advanced System Management Processor. This
processor enables you to manage the functions of the server locally and remotely.
The Advanced System Management Processor also provides system monitoring,
event recording, and dial-out alert capability.
General information
5
Note: The Advanced System Management Processor is sometimes referred to as
the service processor.
Refer to “Advanced System Management ports” on page 104 for more
information.
•
Integrated network environment support
The server comes with an Ethernet controller. This Ethernet controller has an
interface for connecting to 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps networks. The server
automatically selects between 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX. The controller
provides full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission
and reception of data on the Ethernet local area network (LAN).
•
Redundant network-interface card
The addition of an optional, redundant network interface card (NIC) provides a
failover capability to a redundant Ethernet connection. If a problem occurs with
the primary Ethernet connection, all Ethernet traffic associated with this primary
connection is automatically switched to the redundant NIC. This switching
occurs without data loss and without user intervention.
•
IBM ServerGuide CDs
The ServerGuide CDs included with the server provide programs to help you set
up the server and install the network operating system (NOS). The ServerGuide
program detects the hardware options that are installed, and provides the correct
configuration program and device drivers. In addition, the ServerGuide CDs
include a variety of application programs for the server.
Reliability, availability, and serviceability
Three of the most important features in server design are reliability, availability, and
serviceability (RAS). These factors help to ensure the integrity of the data stored on
the server; that the server is available when you want to use it; and that should a
failure occur, you can easily diagnose and repair the failure with minimal
inconvenience.
The following is an abbreviated list of the RAS features that the server supports.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6
Active PCI (hot-plug) adapter slots
Alert on LAN™ capability
Ambient temperature monitoring
Automatic error retry/recovery
Automatic restart after a power failure
Backup basic input/output system (BIOS) switching under the control of the
service processor
Built-in, menu-driven electronically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM)
based diagnostics
Built-in temperature/fan/voltages monitoring
Chipkill memory protection
Cooling fans with speed-sensing capability (hot-swap)
Error codes and messages
Error correcting code (ECC) L2 cache
ECC FSBs
ECC memory
Fast power-on self-test (POST)
Fault-resistant startup
45° C (113° F) normal operating temperature for hard disk drives
Hot-plug Universal Serial bus (USB) keyboard and mouse
Hot-swap drive bays
Hot-swap hard disk drives
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Information and diagnostic light-emitting diode (LED) panels
Integrated Advanced System Management processor subsystem provides control
for remote system management
Light Path Diagnostics™ (LED panel)
Memory scrubbing and Predictive Failure Analysis™ (PFA) (background and real
time)
Menu-driven setup, system configuration, SCSISelect configuration, and
diagnostic programs
Microcode and diagnostic levels available
NIC failover support
Parity checking on the small computer system interface (SCSI) bus and PCI buses
Power and temperature monitoring
Power Managed - Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) level
Power-on self-test (POST)
Power-supply redundancy monitoring
Predictive Failure Analysis™ (PFA) alerts
Processor serial number access
Redundant Ethernet capabilities (with optional adapter)
Redundant hot-swap cooling
Redundant hot-swap power supplies
Remote Connect
Remote system problem-determination support
Standard cables present detection
Standby voltage for system management features and monitoring
System auto-configuring from a configuration menu
System error logging (POST and Advanced System Management processor)
System management monitoring via Intra-Integrated Circuit (I2C) bus
Upgradable flash read-only memory (ROM) resident code
Upgradable POST, basic input/output system (BIOS), diagnostics, and Advanced
System Management processor microcode
Vital Product Data (VPD) on processors, processor board, I/O board, power
supplies, hard disk drive backplane, power backplane, and voltage regulator
modules (VRMs)
Wake on LAN™ capability
Wake on Ring capability
Windows NT failover support
xSeries Server Management
Controls and indicators
The following illustration shows the controls and indicators on the server.
General information
7
Information LED panel
Power-control button
Reset button
Diskette drive in-use light
Diskette-eject button
CD-ROM drive in-use light
CD-ROM eject/load button
Hard-disk drive
activity light
Hard-disk drive
status light
Hard-disk drive status light:
Each of the hot-swap drives has a status light. When this amber light is on
continuously, the drive has failed. When the light flashes slowly (one flash
per second), the drive is being rebuilt. When the light flashes rapidly (three
flashes per second) the controller is identifying the drive.
Hard-disk activity light:
Each of the hot-swap drives has a hard-disk activity light. When this green
light is flashing, the drive is being accessed.
CD-ROM eject/load button:
Press this button to eject or retract the CD-ROM tray.
CD-ROM drive in-use light:
When this light is on, the CD-ROM drive is being accessed.
Diskette-eject button:
Press this button to eject a diskette from the drive.
Diskette drive in-use light:
When this light is on, the diskette drive is being accessed.
Reset button:
Press this button to reset the server and run the power-on self-test (POST).
Power control button:
Press this button to manually turn on or off the server.
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and/or the power switch on the
power supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device.
The device also might have more than one power cord. To remove all
8
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are
disconnected from the power source.
1
2
3
You can start the server in several ways:
•
You can turn on the server by pressing the Power Control button on the
front of the server.
Note: After you plug the power cords of your server into electrical
outlets, wait 20 seconds before pressing the Power Control button.
During this time the system-management processor is initializing
and the Power Control button does not respond.
•
If the server is turned on, a power failure occurs, and unattended- start
mode is enabled in the Configuration/Setup utility program, the server
will start automatically when power is restored.
•
If AC power is present, the server is off, and the wake-up feature is
enabled in the Configuration/Setup utility program, the wake-up feature
will turn on the server at the set time.
•
If AC power is present, the server is off, and ring signal detect is enabled
in the Configuration/Setup utility program, you can turn on the server
by telephone input.
•
The Advanced System Management Processor also can turn on the server.
You can turn off the server in several ways:
•
You can turn off the server by pressing the Power Control button on the
front of the server. Pressing the Power Control button starts an orderly
shutdown of the operating system, if this feature is supported by your
operating system, and places the server in standby mode.
Note: After turning off the server, wait at least 5 seconds before pressing
the Power Control button to power the server on again.
•
You can press and hold the Power Control button for more than 4 seconds
to cause an immediate shutdown of the server and place the server in
standby mode. You can use this feature if the operating system stalls.
•
You can disconnect the server power cords from the electrical outlets to
shut off all power to the server.
Note: Wait about 15 seconds after disconnecting the power cords for
your system to stop running. Watch for the System Power light on
the operator information panel to stop blinking.
Information LED panel:
The lights on this panel give status information for the server. See
“Information LED panel” on page 10.
General information
9
Information LED panel
The following illustration shows the status lights on the Information LED panel.
POST-complete
System power
OK
System error
1
Hard disk drive
activity
2
3
4
100 LINK TX
MB OK
RX
Information
Processor
activity
Ethernet speed
Ethernet-link
status
Ethernet
transmit/receive
activity
System power light:
When this green light is on, power is present in the server. When this light
flashes, the server is in standby mode (the system power supply is turned off
and ac current is present). When this light is off, the power subsystem, the ac
power, or a light has failed.
Attention: If the system power light is off, it does not mean there is no
electrical current present in the server. The light might be burned
out. To remove all electrical current from the server, you must
unplug the server power cords from the electrical outlets or from
the uninterruptible power device.
POST-complete light:
This green light is on when the power-on self-test (POST) completes without
any errors.
Hard disk drive activity light:
This green light flickers when there is activity on a hard disk drive.
Information light:
When this amber light is on, the server power supplies are nonredundant or
some other noncritical event has occurred. The event is recorded in the Event
log. See “Choices available from the Configuration/Setup main menu” on
page 46. A light on the diagnostic panel may also be on; see “Diagnostic
panel LEDs” on page 29.
System error light:
This amber light is on when a system error occurs. A light on the diagnostics
LED panel will also be on to further isolate the error. (For more information,
see “Diagnostic panel LEDs” on page 29.)
Ethernet transmit/receive activity light:
When this green light is on, there is activity between the server from the
network.
Ethernet-link status light:
When this green light is on, there is an active connection on the Ethernet port.
10
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Ethernet speed 100 Mbps:
When this green light is on, the Ethernet speed is 100 Mbps. When the light is
off, the Ethernet speed is 10 Mbps.
Processor activity light:
One or more of these green lights are on when there is microprocessor
activity. The number of lights that are on indicates the number of
microprocessors with activity.
General information
11
12
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Diagnostics
stnetnoC
Diagnostic tools overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
POST beep codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
POST error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Event/error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Small computer system interface messages . . . . . 14
Solving ServeRAID problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ServeRAID controller messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ServeRAID startup messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ServeRAID ISPR, BCS, and ECS POST error codes .
19
Rebuilding a defunct drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Steps for recovering from defunct drives . . . . . . . 24
Rebuilding a hot-swap drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recovering from an incomplete format of a physical
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Recovering from a failure in a failover-environment
25
Replacing a non-hot-plug controller in a failover
pair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Diagnostic programs and error messages . . . . . . . 25
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Starting the diagnostic programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Viewing the test log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Diagnostic error message tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Diagnostic panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Temperature checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recovering BIOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Diagnosing errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller . . . . . . . . 35
Network connection problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Ethernet controller troubleshooting chart. . . . . . . 36
Ethernet controller messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare server ODI driver
messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) driver messages . . . . . . 40
UNIX messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
This section provides basic troubleshooting information to help you resolve some
common problems that might occur with the server.
If you cannot locate and correct the problem using the information in this section,
refer to “Symptom-to-FRU index” on page 143 for more information.
Diagnostic tools overview
The following tools are available to help you identify and resolve hardware-related
problems:
•
POST beep codes, error messages, and error logs
The power-on self-test (POST) generates beep codes and messages to indicate
successful test completion or the detection of a problem. See “POST” on page 14
for more information.
•
Diagnostic programs and error messages
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read-only memory
(ROM) on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing
the major components of the server. See “Diagnostic programs and error
messages” on page 25 for more information.
•
Light path diagnostics
Your server has light-emitting diodes (LEDs) to help you identify problems with
server components. These LEDs are part of the light-path diagnostics that are
built into the server. By following the path of lights, you can quickly identify the
type of system error that occurred. See “Light path diagnostics” on page 28 for
more information.
•
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
Error symptoms
13
These charts list problem symptoms, along with suggested steps to correct the
problems. See the “Diagnosing errors” on page 35 for more information.
POST
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
server components and some of the options installed in the server. This series of tests
is called the power-on self-test or POST.
If POST finishes without detecting any problems, a single beep sounds, the first screen
of the operating system or application program appears, and the System POST
Complete (OK) light is illuminated on the operator information panel.
If POST detects a problem, more than one beep sounds and an error message appears
on the screen. See “POST beep codes” and “POST error messages” for more
information.
Notes:
1.
If you have a power-on password or administrator password set, you must type
the password and press Enter, when prompted, before POST will continue.
2.
A single problem might cause several error messages. When this occurs, work to
correct the cause of the first error message. After you correct the cause of the first
error message, the other error messages usually will not occur the next time you
run the test.
POST beep codes
POST generates beep codes to indicate successful completion or the detection of a
problem.
•
One beep indicates the successful completion of POST.
•
More than one beep indicates that POST detected a problem. For more
information, see “Beep symptoms” on page 143.
POST error messages
POST error messages occur during startup when POST finds a problem with the
hardware or detects a change in the hardware configuration. For a list of POST
errors, see “POST error codes” on page 155.
Event/error logs
The POST error log contains the three most recent error codes and messages that the
system generated during POST. The System Event/Error Log contains all error
messages issued during POST and all system status messages from the Advanced
System Management Processor.
To view the contents of the error logs, start the Configuration/Setup Utility program;
then, select Event/Error Logs from the main menu.
Small computer system interface messages
If you receive a SCSI error message, see “SCSI error codes” on page 165.
Note: If the server does not have a hard disk drive, ignore any message that indicates
that the BIOS is not installed.
14
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
You will get these messages only when running the SCSISelect Utility.
Solving ServeRAID problems
This section describes the ServeRAID text and numeric messages that might appear
during startup. This section also includes some basic information about rebuilding a
defunct drive.
In addition to the information provided in this section, you might want to use the
ServeRAID IPSSEND program to help isolate ServeRAID problems.
ServeRAID controller messages
This section lists the ServeRAID messages that might appear during system startup.
The ServeRAID controllers provide a Device Event Log that collects statistics on the
number and types of events that occur on a selected physical drive. After correcting a
problem with the array, clear the log so that you can identify any subsequent errors
quickly. For information about clearing the event log, see "eraseevent" on page 137.
All physical drives contain unique identifiers, such as the drive serial number and
manufacturer. During configuration, the ServeRAID controller stores this
information.
ServeRAID startup messages
During power-on self-test (POST), the ServeRAID controller compares the stored
configuration information to the configuration that is actually present. If a
discrepancy exists, one or more status messages appear after POST completes, but
before the operating system loads.
Notes:
1.
When the ServeRAID controller requires your input, a list of function keys will
appear below the message.
2.
Where the Action information tells you to start the IBM ServeRAID configuration
program, insert the IBM ServeRAID Support CD into the CD-ROM drive; then,
restart the server. The Action column also provides general information about
the message.
3.
Where SID or ch appears in these messages, sid is the SCSI ID for the device, and
ch is the channel to which the device is attached.
4.
Where m or n appears in these messages, a number will appear in the actual
message.
Following are messages associated with the ServeRAID subsystem in alphabetical
order.
A new drive was installed.
Explanation: When the ServeRAID controller detects a new drive that is not part of the
current configuration, the following message appears:
x new ready drives found
where x is the number of ready drives found.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
Diagnostics
15
Auto rearrange.
Explanation: Auto rearrange is enabled or disabled.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
Battery-Backup Write Cache Not Responding
Explanation: BIOS code detected a bad or failed battery-backup write cache.
Action: Press F9 to remove the battery-backup write cache from the configuration, or press
F10 to exit without change.
Battery-Backup Write Cache Replacement
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller detects that the battery-backup write cache is
defective.
Action: Press F8 if you replaced the battery-backup write cache, or press F10 if you have not
replaced the battery-backup write cache.
Configured drives are missing.
Explanation: When the ServeRAID controller detects that a previously configured drive is
missing, the following message appears:
x online drives not responding
where x is the number of drives not responding. Example of a possible message: Online
Drive on Channel 3 SCSI ID 3 is not responding.
Action: Press one of the following keys:
F2 – Detailed description. Press this key for a detailed description of the problem, such as the
example message above.
F4 – Retry. Press this key after correcting a problem. For example, press F4 after you turn on
the external storage enclosure that contains the physical drive.
F5 – Change the configuration and set the drives to defunct. Press this key to accept the new
state that the ServeRAID controller will assign to the drive. For example, the ServeRAID
controller will assign the drive a state of defunct or empty. You can also press F5 when you
must remove a drive. RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives are present, and
performance in a degraded mode is acceptable. The ServeRAID controller will assign the
drive a state of defunct, but the server can complete startup. However, the array will remain
in critical mode and the potential for data loss will exist until you replace and rebuild the
defunct drive. To prevent the loss of data, replace and rebuild the defunct drive in a timely
manner.
Note:
A physical drive in the defunct state does not necessarily mean that you need to
replace the drive. Before you replace the drive, ensure that:
1.
All cables are connected properly to the backplane and to the physical drive.
Also, ensure that all cables inside the server are connected properly.
2.
The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in the drive bay.
3.
Try rebuilding the drive if you have not already done so. See “Rebuilding a
defunct drive” on page 23 for more information.
After you perform these steps, if the physical drive does not function properly, replace the
drive.
F10 – Continue booting without changing the configuration. Press this key to continue
without change to the configuration.
16
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Configured drives are not in the configured location.
Explanation: When the ServeRAID controller detects that a previously configured drive is
present, but the drive is in a new location, the following message appears:
x online drive has been rearranged
where x is the number of drives that have been rearranged. Examples of possible messages
are:
Online Drive on Channel 3 SCSI ID 4 moved to Channel 3 SCSI ID 3
Online Drive on Channel 3 SCSI ID 3 moved to Channel 3 SCSI ID 4
Action: Press one of the following keys:
F2 – Detailed description. Press this key for a detailed description of the problem, such as the
example messages above.
F4 – Retry. Press this key after correcting a problem. For example, press F4 after you move
the physical drive to its previously assigned location.
F5 – Change the configuration and set the drive to defunct. Press this key to accept the new
state that the ServeRAID controller will assign to the drive. For example, the ServeRAID
controller will assign the drive a state of defunct or empty.
Note:
A physical drive in the defunct state does not necessarily mean that you need to
replace the drive. Before you replace the drive, ensure that:
1.
All cables are connected properly to the backplane and to the physical drive.
Also, ensure that all cables inside the server are connected properly.
2.
The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in the drive bay.
3.
If you have not already attempted to rebuild the drive, try rebuilding it. See
“Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page 23 for more information.
After you perform these steps, if the physical drive does not function properly, replace the
drive.
F6 – Change the configuration and accept the rearrangement. Press this key to modify the
configuration to match the current drive location. You might remove the hot-swap drives
from the server for security or maintenance reasons. If you replace the drives but install them
in different drive bays, you can press F6 to accept the new locations, and the ServeRAID
controller will update the configuration.
F10 – Continue startup without changing the configuration. Press this key to continue
without change to the configuration.
Controller is not responding to commands. No logical drives are installed.
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller is not operational.
Action: Run the IBM ServeRAID Support CD and reseat the adapter. If the problem persists,
replace the adapter.
Error: Cannot disable this controller BIOS.
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller was unable to prevent an extra copy of its BIOS code
from being stored on the server. This condition occurs when the server contains multiple
ServeRAID controllers.
Action: This is an information message. No action is required.
Installation stopped.
Explanation: The server cannot access the ServeRAID controller.
Action: This is a follow-on message to a preceding message. Follow the Action instructions
for the preceding message to resolve the problem.
Diagnostics
17
New controller installed in a configured server or drives are imported.
Explanation: When the ServeRAID controller detects that the identifiers of the drives do not
match the controller configuration information, the following message appears: x online
drive(s) found with mismatch configuration Examples of possible messages:
Configuration mismatch Channel 1 SCSI ID 0 with Host ID
Configuration mismatch Channel 2 SCSI ID 0 with Host ID
Action: Press one of the following keys:
F2 – Detailed description. Press this key for a detailed description of the problem, such as the
example messages above.
F4 – Retry. Press this key after correcting the problem. For example, press F4 after you move
the physical drive to its previously assigned location, or after you install the original physical
drives back in the server.
F5 – Change the configuration and set the drive to defunct. Press this key to accept the new
state that the ServeRAID controller will assign to the drive. For example, the ServeRAID
controller will assign the drive a state of defunct or empty.
Note: A physical drive in the defunct state does not necessarily mean that you need to
replace the drive. Before you replace the drive, ensure that:
1.
All cables are connected properly to the backplane or processor or I/O board, and to the
physical drive. Also, ensure that all cables inside the server are connected properly.
2.
The hot-swap drive trays are seated properly in the drive bay.
3.
If you have not already attempted to rebuild the drive, try rebuilding it. See “Rebuilding
a defunct drive” on page 23 for more information.
After you perform these steps, if the physical drive does not function properly, replace the
drive.
F7 – Import configuration information from drive. Press this key to restart the server. Press
this key to import the configuration information from the drive and to update the
configuration information for the ServeRAID controller. This choice is useful when you
replace the ServeRAID controller in an existing ServeRAID subsystem. You also might press
F7 if you replace a whole set of drives with drives that were configured in another server with
a ServeRAID controller. When you install drives in a server that has no logical drives
defined, the F7 choice will not appear. The ServeRAID controller does not contain any logical
drives in its factory configuration. Therefore, F7 will not appear. In this case, do the
following:
1.
Restart the server and press Ctrl+I to enter the Mini-Configuration program (see “Using
the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration program” on page 130).
2.
Select Advanced Functions.
3.
Select Copy the Configuration from Drives to the Controller and follow the instructions
on the screen.
Recoverable configuration error.
Explanation: The configuration data stored in NVRAM does not match the configuration
data stored in the EEPROM.
Action:
18
1.
Press Ctrl+I to access the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration menu.
2.
Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu.
3.
Select Copy the Configuration from Drives to the Controller.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Unrecoverable configuration error.
Explanation: The configuration data stored in NVRAM does not match the configuration
data stored in the EEPROM.
Action:
1.
Press Ctrl+I to access the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration menu.
2.
Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu.
3.
Select Restore to the Factory Default Settings.
WARNING: n logical drives are critical; n logical drives are offline.
Explanation: One or more physical drives have failed.
Action: Replace the defunct drives as soon as possible to prevent data loss.
Your server has an error due to a Blocked Logical Drive.
Explanation: One or more logical drives are blocked. A blocked logical drive cannot be
accessed.
Action: Press F4 to unblock the logical drive, or press F5 to continue without unblocking.
ServeRAID ISPR, BCS, and ECS POST error
codes
After the ServeRAID POST completes, register information appears on the screen in
hexadecimal format, as follows:
Hardware:
ISPR=aaaa
BCS=bb
ECS=cc
ISPR displays the four-digit Interrupt Status Report Register code, BCS displays the
Basic Configuration Status Register code, and ECS displays the Extended
Configuration Status Register code.
For example:
Controller
Controller
Controller
Controller
1
2
3
4
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
5,
4,
3,
2,
Status:Not responding properly - Error Code=0B0
Logical Drive=0, Other=0, Firmware=2.88.10, Status=Ok
Logical Drive=0, Other=0, Firmware=3.60.13, Status=Ok
Logical Drive=1, Other=1, Firmware=1.00.09, Status=Ok
If no errors occur:
ISPR (aaaa) = EF10
BCS (bb) = 0F or 09
ECS (cc) = 00
If an error occurs, refer to: “ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error codes” on page 161 for the
ISPR error codes and “Basic and Extended Configuration Status Register Codes” on
page 20 for the BCS and ECS error codes.
Diagnostics
19
Basic and Extended Configuration Status Register Codes:
BCS
ECS
Explanation and possible recovery action
Code not in
table
Code not
in table
Explanation: The ServeRAID controller is not functioning
properly.
Action: Replace the adapter or the I/O board with integrated
controller.
00
01
Explanation: Invalid flash configuration.
Action: Start the IBM ServeRAID Support CD and follow the
instructions that appear on the screen.
00
02
Explanation: Invalid NVRAM configuration.
Action: Start the IBM ServeRAID Support CD and follow the
instructions that appear on the screen.
00
03
Explanation: Invalid flash and NVRAM configuration.
Action: Start the IBM ServeRAID Support CD and follow the
instructions that appear on the screen.
01
08
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or
online/rebuild drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
01
18
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or
online/rebuild and hot-spare/standby hot-spare drives are not
responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
01
28
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or
online/rebuild and ready/standby drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
01
38
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or
online/rebuild, hot-spare/standby hot-spare, and
ready/standby drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
01
48
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or
online/rebuild drives are not responding and unidentified drives
were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
01
58
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or
online/rebuild and hot-spare/standby hot-spare drives are not
responding and unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
01
68
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or
online/rebuild and ready/standby drives are not responding
and unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
20
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
BCS
ECS
Explanation and possible recovery action
01
78
Explanation: No configuration was found in drives, or
online/rebuild, hot-spare/standby hot-spare, and
ready/standby drives are not responding and unidentified
drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
03
88
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it
has valid configuration, and online/rebuild drives are not
responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
03
98
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it
has valid configuration, and online/rebuild and hot
spare/standby hot-spare drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
03
A8
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it
has valid configuration, and online/rebuild and ready/standby
drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
03
B8
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it
has valid configuration, and online/rebuild, hot-spare/standby
hot-spare, and ready/standby drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
03
C8
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it
has valid configuration, and online/rebuild drives are not
responding and unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
03
D8
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it
has valid configuration, and online/rebuild and hotspare/standby hot-spare drives are not responding and
unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
03
E8
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it
has valid configuration, and online/rebuild and ready/standby
drives are not responding and unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
03
F8
Explanation: A drive was imported from another system and it
has valid configuration, and online/rebuild, hot-spare/standby
hot-spare, and ready/standby drives are not responding and
unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F7, or F10.
07
08
Explanation: Online/rebuild drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
Diagnostics
21
BCS
ECS
Explanation and possible recovery action
07
0C
Explanation: Online/rebuild drives are not responding, and a
drive was found at the incorrect SCSI ID.
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.
07
18
Explanation: Online/rebuild and hot-spare/standby hot-spare
drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
07
1C
Explanation: Online/rebuild and hot spare/standby hot-spare
drives are not responding, and a drive was found at the incorrect
SCSI ID.
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.
07
28
Explanation: Online/rebuild and ready/standby drives are not
responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
07
2C
Explanation: Online/rebuild and ready/standby drives are not
responding, and a drive was found at the incorrect SCSI ID.
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.
07
38
Explanation: Online/rebuild, ready/standby, and hotspare/standby hot-spare drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
07
3C
Explanation: Online/rebuild, ready/standby, and hotspare/standby hot-spare drives are not responding, and a drive
was found at the incorrect SCSI ID.
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.
07
48
Explanation: Online/rebuild drives are not responding, and
unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
07
4C
Explanation: Online/rebuild drives are not responding, and a
drive was found at the incorrect SCSI ID, and unidentified drives
were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.
07
58
Explanation: Online/rebuild and hot spare/standby hot-spare
drives are not responding, and unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
07
5C
Explanation: Online/rebuild and hot spare/standby hot-spare
drives are not responding, a drive was found at the incorrect
SCSI ID, and unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.
07
68
Explanation: Online/rebuild and ready/standby drives are not
responding, and unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
22
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
BCS
ECS
Explanation and possible recovery action
07
6C
Explanation: Online/rebuild and ready/standby drives are not
responding, a drive was found at the incorrect SCSI ID, and
unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.
07
78
Explanation: Online/rebuild, ready/standby, and hotspare/standby hot-spare drives are not responding, and
unidentified drives were found.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
07
7C
Explanation: Online/rebuild, ready/standby, and hotspare/standby hot-spare drives are not responding, a drive was
found at the incorrect SCSI ID, and unidentified drives were
found.
Action: Press F4, F5, F6, or F10.
09
00
Explanation: No error occurred.
Action: No action is required.
09
10
Explanation: Hot-spare/standby hot-spare drives are not
responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
09
20
Explanation: Ready/standby drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
09
30
Explanation: Hot-spare/standby hot-spare and ready/standby
drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
0F
00
Explanation: No error occurred.
Action: No action is required.
0F
10
Explanation: Hot-spare/standby hot-spare drives are not
responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
0F
20
Explanation: Ready/standby drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
0F
30
Explanation: Hot-spare/standby hot-spare and ready/standby
drives are not responding.
Action: Press F4, F5, or F10.
Rebuilding a defunct drive
A physical drive is defunct when there is a loss of communication between the
controller and the physical drive. This can be caused by any of the following:
•
An improperly connected cable, physical drive, or controller
•
A loss of power to a drive
•
A defective cable, backplane, physical drive or controller
Diagnostics
23
In each case, the communication problem needs to be resolved, and then a rebuild
operation is required to reconstruct the data for the device in its disk array. The
ServeRAID controllers can reconstruct RAID level-1 and RAID level-5 logical drives,
but they cannot reconstruct data stored in RAID level-0 logical drives.
To prevent data-integrity problems, the ServeRAID controllers sets the RAID level-0
logical drives to blocked during a rebuild operation. After the rebuild operation
completes, you can unblock the RAID level-0 logical drives, and access them once
again. Remember, however, that the logical drive might contain damaged data.
Steps for recovering from defunct drives
If the defunct drives are part of an array, do the following:
•
If more than one physical drive in an array is defunct, replace DDD drives and
restore from backup.
•
If a rebuild operation is in progress, wait until the rebuild is complete.
•
If a rebuild is not in progress and only one physical drive in the array is defunct,
replace the drive.
Rebuilding a hot-swap drive
A hot-swap rebuild refers to a rebuild operation that is started by the ServeRAID
controller when it detects that a drive that is part of a RAID-I or RAID-J array and in
the defunct state has been removed and reinserted on the SCSI backplane. The
reinsertion of the physical drive, whether it is the same drive or a new drive, will
trigger the ServeRAID controller to start the rebuild operation. During the rebuild
operation, the drive being rebuilt is in the rebuild state, and the logical drive remains
critical until the rebuild operation has been successfully completed.
On IBM servers, when a hot-spare drive is available, the rebuild operation will begin
automatically without the requirement to replace the failed drive.
To start a hot-swap rebuild, do the following:
1.
Without removing the drive completely, gently remove the physical drive from
the server, using the handle of the hot-swap tray. If necessary, refer to the
documentation that comes with your server on removing a physical drive.
2.
Wait 20 seconds to allow the physical drive to completely spin down.
Note: When power is removed from a hot-swap drive, the drive immediately
parks the heads, locks the actuator in the "landing zone", and begins
spinning down. However, the spinning down of the disk might require up
to 20 seconds after power is removed. Do not move the drive while it is
spinning down. Moving the drive while it is spinning down may damage
the drive.
3.
Gently replace into the server the physical drive that you removed. Make sure the
drive is completely installed in the backplane connector.
Recovering from an incomplete format of a physical
drive
During formatting of a physical drive, if the format process is stopped by a system
reset, system shut down, power outage, or by some other means, the physical drive
becomes inoperable.
To enable the physical drive to communicate with the ServeRAID controller again, do
the following:
24
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
1.
Note the channel of the ServeRAID controller to which the physical drive is
connected.
2.
Note the SCSI ID of the physical drive.
3.
Use ipssend format to restart the format of the physical drive. The syntax is:
ipssend format controller channel sid
where:
•
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)
After the format is complete, the ServeRAID controller will be able to recognize
the drive again.
Recovering from a failure in a failover-environment
In a failover environment, when the ServeRAID device driver is unable to send a
command to the primary controller and the primary controller does not respond to a
reset command, the device driver attempts to failover to the secondary controller.
Note: Loose cables or defective physical drives will not cause a failover to occur.
Replacing a non-hot-plug controller in a failover pair
If a failed controller is not in a hot-plug PCI slot, do the following to replace it:
1.
Shutdown the server.
2.
Replace the failed controller.
3.
Reconfigure the new controller.
Notes:
1.
Be sure the firmware level of the new controller is the same as the controller you
are replacing. Be sure to use the same controller name, partner name, and SCSI
initiator ID for the controller you are replacing.
2.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Hardware Maintenance Manual for the
ServeRAID controller being serviced.
If the failed controller is in a hot-plug slot, refer to the documentation that comes with
the server for instructions for replacing the controller.
Diagnostic programs and error messages
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read-only memory (ROM)
on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of the server.
Diagnostic error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not intended to be
used to identify a failing part. Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems
that are indicated by error messages should be performed by trained service
personnel.
Sometimes the first error to occur causes additional errors. In this case, the server
displays more than one error message. Always follow the suggested action
instructions for the first error message that appears.
The following sections contain the error codes that might appear in the detailed test
log and summary log when running the diagnostic programs.
Diagnostics
25
The error code format is as follows:
fff-ttt-iii-date-cc-text message
where:
fff
is the three-digit function code that indicates the function being
tested when the error occurred. For example, function code 089 is for
the microprocessor.
ttt
is the three-digit failure code that indicates the exact test failure that
was encountered.
iii
is the three-digit device ID.
date
is the date that the diagnostic test was run and the error recorded.
cc
is the check digit that is used to verify the validity of the information.
text message
is the diagnostic message that indicates the reason for the problem.
Text messages
The diagnostic text message format is as follows:
Function Name: Result (test specific string)
where:
Function Name
is the name of the function being tested when the error occurred. This
corresponds to the function code (fff) given in the previous list.
Result can be one of the following:
Passed This result occurs when the diagnostic test completes without any
errors.
Failed This result occurs when the diagnostic test discovers an error.
User Aborted
This result occurs when you stop the diagnostic test before it is
complete.
Not Applicable
This result occurs when you specify a diagnostic test for a device that
is not present.
Aborted This result occurs when the test could not proceed because of the
system configuration.
Warning This result occurs when a possible problem is reported during the
diagnostic test, such as when a device that is to be tested is not
installed.
Test Specific String
This is additional information that you can use to analyze the problem.
Starting the diagnostic programs
You can press F1 while running the diagnostic programs to obtain Help information.
You also can press F1 from within a help screen to obtain online documentation from
which you can select different categories. To exit Help and return to where you left
off, press Esc.
To start the diagnostic programs:
26
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
1.
Turn on the server and watch the screen.
Note: To run the diagnostic programs, you must start the server with the highest
level password that is set. That is, if an administrator password is set, you
must enter the administrator password, not the power-on password, to
run the diagnostic programs.
2.
When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2.
3.
Type in the appropriate password when prompted; then, press Enter.
4.
Select either Extended or Basic from the top of the screen.
5.
When the Diagnostic Programs screen appears, select the test you want to run
from the list that appears; then, follow the instructions on the screen.
Notes:
a.
If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server
and try running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem persists, flash
server with the latest diagnostics code and run the test again.
b.
The keyboard and mouse (pointing device) tests assume that a keyboard and
mouse are attached to the server.
c.
If you run the diagnostic programs with no mouse attached to the server, you
will not be able to navigate between test categories using the Next Cat and
Prev Catbuttons. All other functions provided by mouse-selectable buttons
are also available using the function keys.
d. You can run the USB interface test and the USB external loopback test only if
there are no USB devices attached.
e.
You can view server configuration information (such as system configuration,
memory contents, interrupt request (IRQ) use, direct memory access (DMA)
use, device drivers, and so on) by selecting Hardware Info from the top of the
screen.
When the tests have completed, you can view the Test Log by selecting Utility from
the top of the screen.
If the hardware checks out OK but the problem persists during normal server
operations, a software error might be the cause. If you suspect a software problem,
refer to the information that comes with the software package.
Viewing the test log
The test log will not contain any information until after the diagnostic program has
run.
Note: If you already are running the diagnostic programs, begin with step 3..
To view the test log:
1.
Turn on the server and watch the screen.
If the server is on, shut down the operating system and restart the server.
2.
When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2.
If a power-on password or administrator password is set, the server prompts you
for it. Type in the appropriate password; then, press Enter.
3.
When the Diagnostic Programs screen appears, select Utility from the top of the
screen.
4.
Select View Test Log from the list that appears; then, follow the instructions on
the screen.
Diagnostics
27
The system maintains the test-log data while the server is powered on. When you
turn off the power to the server, the test log is cleared.
Diagnostic error message tables
For descriptions of the error messages that might appear when you run the diagnostic
programs, see “Diagnostic error codes” on page 148. If diagnostic error messages
appear that are not listed in those tables, make sure that the server has the latest levels
of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, ServeRAID, and diagnostics
microcode installed.
Light path diagnostics
The server has LEDs to help you identify problems with some server components.
These LEDs are part of the light path diagnostics built into the server. By following
the path of lights you can quickly identify the type of system error that occurred.
Power supply LEDs
The AC and DC power LEDs on the power supply provide status information about
the power supply. See “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page 88 for the
location of these LEDs. See “Power checkout” on page 32 for more information on
power problems.
Handle
Filler panel
DC power light
AC power light
The following table describes the AC and DC power LEDs.
AC power
LED
On
28
DC power
LED
On
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Description and action
The power supply is on and operating correctly.
AC power
LED
On
DC power
LED
Off
Description and action
There is a dc power problem.
Possible causes:
1.
The server is not turned on (the power LED is blinking on
the front of the server).
Action: Press the power-control button to start the server.
2.
Off
The power supply has failed.
Action: Replace the power supply.
There is an ac power problem.
Off
Possible causes:
1.
There is no ac power to the power supply.
Verify that:
Actions:
2.
•
The electrical cord is properly connected to
the server.
•
The electrical outlet functions properly.
The power supply has failed.
Action: Replace the power supply.
Diagnostic panel LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the diagnostics panel inside the server.
See Table 1 on page 31 for information on identifying problems using these LEDs.
SMI
NMI
SP
PCIA
PCIB
PCIC
DASD1
MEM
CPU
VRM
FAN
TEMP
NON
RED
OVER
SPEC
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
Light path diagnostics
You can use the light path diagnostics built into the server to quickly identify the type
of system error that occurred. The server is designed so that LEDs remain illuminated
when the server shuts down, as long as the power supplies are operating properly.
This feature helps you to isolate the problem if an error causes the server to shut
down.
If the system error LED (on the information LED panel) is not lit and no diagnostics
panel LEDs are lit, it means that the light path diagnostics have not detected a system
error.
Diagnostics
29
If the system error LED (on the information LED panel) is lit, it means that a system
error was detected. Check to see which of the LEDs on the diagnostics panel inside
the server are lit and refer to the following table:
30
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
LED
Cause
Action
None
The system error log is 75% or more full; a PFA alert
was logged; or a failure occurred on the I2C bus.
Check the system error log and correct any problems. See “Choices
available from the Configuration/Setup main menu” on page 46 for
information about clearing the error log. Disconnecting the server from
all power sources for at least 20 seconds will turn off the system error
LED.
SMI
A systems management event occurred.
Restart the server.
NMI
A nonmaskable interrupt occurred. The PCIA, PCIB,
or PCIC LED will probably also be on.
1.
If the PCIA, PCIB, or PCIC LED is not on, restart the server.
If the problem persists, try to determine the failing adapter by removing
one adapter at a time and restarting the server after each adapter is
removed.
SP
1.
Run service processor diagnostics.
2.
Replace Legacy I/O board.
An error occurred on PCI bus A. An adapter in PCI
slot 1 or 2, or the processor board caused the error.
1.
Check the error log for additional information.
2.
If you cannot correct the problem from the information in the error
log, try to determine the failing adapter by removing one adapter
at a time from PCI bus A (PCI slots 1–2) and restarting the server
after each adapter is removed.
An error occurred on PCI bus B. An adapter in PCI slot
3, 4, 5, or 6 or the processor board caused the error.
1.
Check the error log for additional information.
2.
If you cannot correct the problem from the information in the error
log, try to determine the failing adapter by removing one adapter
at a time from PCI bus B (PCI slots 3–6) and restarting the server
after each adapter is removed.
PCIC
An error occurred on PCI bus C. An error on the
processor or I/O board caused the problem.
Check the error log for additional information. If the error log indicates
a problem with the integrated SCSI controller, the Ethernet controller or
video controller, see “Starting the diagnostic programs” on page 26.
DASD
A hot-swap hard disk drive has failed on SCSI channel
B.
1.
If the TEMP LED is also on, take the actions listed for that LED.
2.
If the amber status LED on one of the hot-swap hard disk drives is
on, replace the drive.
A memory error occurred.
1.
Check the DIMM error LEDs on the memory board.
2.
Replace the DIMM indicated by the lit DIMM error LEDs.
1.
Check the microprocessor error LEDs on the memory board. If a
microprocessor error LED is on for a microprocessor connector that
has a terminator card installed instead of a microprocessor, the
microprocessors are not installed in the correct order. See
“Installing a microprocessor kit” on page 86 for information about
the correct order for installing microprocessors and VRMs.
Otherwise, continue with the next step.
2.
Turn off the server, reseat the microprocessor indicated by the lit
microprocessor error LED, and restart the server.
3.
If the problem persists, replace the microprocessor.
One of the voltage regulator modules on the processor
board has failed.
1.
Check the VRM error LEDs on the processor board.
2.
Turn off the server, reseat the VRM indicated by the lit VRM error
LED, and restart the server.
3.
If the problem persists, replace the VRM.
One of the fan assemblies has failed or is operating too
slowly.
The LED on the failing fan assembly will be lit. Replace the fan
assembly.
PCIA
PCIB
MEM
CPU
VRM
FAN
The service processor has failed.
One of the microprocessors has failed or a
microprocessor is installed in the wrong connector.
Note:
A failing fan can also cause the TEMP and
DASD LEDs to be on.
Table 1. Light path diagnostics.
Diagnostics
31
LED
TEMP
Cause
The system temperature has exceeded the maximum
rating.
Action
1.
Check to see if a fan has failed. If it has, replace the fan.
2.
Make sure the room temperature is not too high. (See “Features
and specifications” on page 3.)
If the problem persists, see “Temperature checkout”.
NON
RED
Server drawing too much power to operate in a
redundant power mode.
System can continue to operate in a nonredundant power mode. To
operate in a redundant mode, add a power supply or remove most
recently installed options.
OVER
SPEC
The server is drawing more power than the power
supplies are rated for.
Either add a power supply or remove a device from the server.
PS1
The first power supply has failed.
Replace the first power supply.
PS2
The second power supply has failed.
Replace the second power supply.
PS3
The third power supply has failed.
Replace the third power supply.
PS4
The fourth power supply has failed.
Replace the fourth power supply.
Table 1. Light path diagnostics.
Power checkout
Power problems can be difficult to troubleshoot. For instance, a short circuit can exist
anywhere on any of the power distribution busses. Usually a short circuit will cause
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition.
A general procedure for troubleshooting power problems is as follows:
1.
Power off the system and disconnect the AC cord(s).
2.
Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for
instance if there is a loose screw causing a short circuit on a circuit board.
3.
Remove adapters and disconnect the cables and power connectors to all internal
and external devices until system is at minimum configuration required for
power on (see "Minimum operating requirements" on page 154).
4.
Reconnect the AC cord and power on the system. If the system powers up
successfully, replace adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is
isolated. If system does not power up from minimal configuration, replace FRUs
of minimal configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.
To use this method it is important to know the minimum configuration required for a
system to power up (see page 154). For specific problems, see “Power error
messages” on page 167.
Temperature checkout
Proper cooling of the system is important for proper operation and system reliability.
For a typical server, you should make sure:
32
•
Each of the drive bays has either a drive or a filler panel installed
•
Each of the power supply bays has either a power supply or a filler panel installed
•
The top cover is in place during normal operation
•
There is at least 50 mm (2 inches) of ventilated space at the sides of the server and
100 mm (4 inches) at the rear of the server
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
•
The top cover is removed for no longer than 30 minutes while the server is
operating
•
The processor housing cover covering the processor and memory area is removed
for no longer that ten minutes while the server is operating
•
A removed hot-swap drive is replaced within two minutes of removal
•
Cables for optional adapters are routed according to the instructions provided
with the adapters (ensure that cables are not restricting air flow)
•
The fans are operating correctly and the air flow is good
•
A failed fan is replaced within 48 hours
In addition, ensure that the environmental specifications for the system are met. See
“Features and specifications” on page 3.
For more information on specific temperature error messages, see “Temperature error
messages” on page 166.
Recovering BIOS
If the BIOS code in the server has become corrupted, such as from a power failure
during a flash update, you can recover the BIOS using the recovery boot block and a
BIOS flash diskette.
Note: You can obtain a BIOS flash diskette from one of the following sources:
•
Use the ServerGuide program to make a BIOS flash diskette.
•
Download a BIOS flash diskette from the World Wide Web. Go to
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support/, select IBM Server Support, and make
the selections for the server.
The flash memory of the server consists of a primary page and a backup page. The J56
jumper controls which page is used to start the server. If the BIOS in the primary page
is corrupted, you can use the backup page to start the server; then boot the BIOS Flash
Diskette to restore the BIOS to the primary page.
To recover the BIOS:
1.
Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables and
power cords; then, remove the cover.
2.
Locate jumper J56 on the processor board (see “Processor board jumpers” on page
57).
3.
Move J56 to pins 1 and 2 to enable secondary boot block page.
4.
Insert the BIOS flash diskette into the diskette drive.
5.
Restart the server.
6.
The system begins the power-on self-test (POST). Select 1 – Update POST/BIOS
from the menu that contains various flash (update) options.
7.
When you are asked if you would like to move the current POST/BIOS image to
the backup ROM location, type N.
Attention: Typing Y will copy the corrupted BIOS into the secondary page.
8.
When you are asked if you would like to save the current code to a diskette, select
N.
9.
You will be asked to choose which language you wish to use. Select your
language (0-7) and press Enter to accept your choice. You will be prompted to
remove the diskette and press Enter to restart the system. Remove the flash
diskette from the diskette drive.
Diagnostics
33
Attention: Do not press Enter to reboot the system at this time.
10. Power-off the server.
11. Move jumper J56 back to pins 2 and 3 to return to normal startup mode.
12. Restart the server. The system should start up normally.
Replacing the battery
IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery must be
handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery, you must
adhere to the following instructions.
CAUTION:
When replacing the battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an equivalent
type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a module
containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type made by
the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not
properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
•
Throw or immerse into water
•
Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)
•
Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
Note: In the U.S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery disposal.
If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy-metal battery or a battery with
heavy-metal components, be aware of the following environmental consideration.
Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be disposed of with
normal domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge by the manufacturer,
distributor, or representative, to be recycled or disposed of in a proper manner.
Note:
After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure your server and reset the
system date and time.
To replace the battery:
34
1.
Read the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
2.
Follow any special handling and installation instructions supplied with the
battery.
3.
Turn off the server and all attached devices and disconnect all external cables and
power cords (see “Safety information” on page 180); then remove the top cover.
4.
Locate the battery on the processor board (see “Processor board component
locations” on page 55).
5.
Remove adapters as necessary so you can access the battery. (See “Working with
adapters” on page 61.)
6.
Lift and remove the plastic dividers by pressing the latches on the top ends of the
dividers toward the dividers and lifting the dividers from the server.
7.
Remove the battery:
a.
Use one finger to lift the battery clip over the battery.
b.
Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward the rear of the server. The
spring mechanism behind the battery will push it out toward you as you slide
it forward.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
c.
Use your thumb and index finger to pull the battery from under the battery
clip.
d. Ensure that the battery clip is touching the base of the battery socket by
pressing gently on the clip.
8.
9.
Insert the new battery:
a.
Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the front of the socket, under the
battery clip.
b.
As you slide it under the battery clip, press the battery down into the socket.
Reinstall any adapters that you removed.
10. Insert the plastic dividers into the divider guides.
11. Reinstall the top cover.
Note: You must wait approximately 20 seconds after you plug the power cord of
your server into an electrical outlet before the power control button
becomes active.
12. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and set configuration parameters
as needed. Refer to “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 45.
Diagnosing errors
To find solutions to problems that have definite symptoms, see “Error symptoms” on
page 153.
If you cannot find the problem there, go to “Starting the diagnostic programs” on
page 26 to test the server.
If you have just added new software or a new option and the server is not working, do
the following before using the error symptoms table:
•
Remove the software or device that you just added.
•
Run the diagnostic tests to determine if the server is running correctly.
•
Reinstall the new software or new device.
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller
This section provides troubleshooting information for problems that might occur with
the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet controller.
Diagnostics
35
Network connection problems
If the Ethernet controller cannot connect to the network, check the following:
•
Make sure that the cable is installed correctly.
The network cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is
attached but the problem persists, try a different cable.
If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use Category 5
cabling.
If you directly connect two workstations (without a hub), or if you are not using a
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable.
Note: To determine whether a hub has an X port, check the port label. If the label
contains an X, the hub has an X port.
•
•
Determine if the hub supports auto-negotiation. If not, try configuring the
integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and duplex mode of
the hub.
Check the Ethernet controller lights on the operator information panel.
These lights indicate whether a problem exists with the connector, cable, or hub.
— The Ethernet Link Status light illuminates when the Ethernet controller
receives a LINK pulse from the hub. If the light is off, there might be a
defective connector or cable, or a problem with the hub.
— The Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity light illuminates when the Ethernet
controller sends or receives data over the Ethernet Network. If the Ethernet
Transmit/Receive Activity light is off, make sure that the hub and network
are operating and that the correct device drivers are loaded.
•
•
•
•
— The Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps light illuminates when the Ethernet controller
LAN speed is 100 Mbps.
Make sure that you are using the correct device drivers, supplied with the server.
Check for operating system-specific causes for the problem.
Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.
Test the Ethernet controller.
How you test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating system you are
using (see the Ethernet controller device driver README file).
Ethernet controller troubleshooting chart
You can use the following troubleshooting chart to find solutions to 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet controller problems that have definite symptoms.
36
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Table 2. Ethernet troubleshooting chart.
Ethernet controller problem
Suggested Action
The server stops running
The PCI BIOS interrupt settings are incorrect.
when loading device drivers.
Check the following:
•
Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet controller is also
assigned to another device in the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some devices do not
function well when they share an interrupt with a dissimilar PCI device. Try
changing the IRQ assigned to the Ethernet controller or the other device. For
example, for NetWare Versions 3 and 4 it is recommended that disk controllers not
share interrupts with LAN controllers.
Ethernet Link Status light
does not light.
The Ethernet Transmit/
Receive Activity light does
not light.
Data is incorrect or sporadic.
The Ethernet controller
stopped working when
another adapter was added
to the server.
•
Make sure that you are using the most recent device driver available from the
World Wide Web.
•
Run the network diagnostic program.
Check the following:
•
Make sure that the hub is turned on.
•
Check all connections at the Ethernet controller and the hub.
•
Check the cable. A crossover cable is required unless the hub has an X designation.
•
Use another port on the hub.
•
If the hub does not support auto-negotiation, manually configure the Ethernet
controller to match the hub.
•
If you manually configured the duplex mode, make sure that you also manually
configure the speed.
•
Run diagnostics on the LEDs.
Check the following:
Note:
The Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity LED illuminates only when data is
sent to or by this Ethernet controller.
•
Make sure that you have loaded the network device drivers.
•
The network might be idle. Try sending data from this workstation.
•
Run diagnostics on the LEDs.
•
The function of this LED can be changed by device driver load parameters. If
necessary, remove any LED parameter settings when you load the device drivers.
Check the following:
•
Make sure that you are using Category 5 cabling when operating the server at 100
Mbps.
•
Make sure that the cables do not run close to noise-inducing sources like
fluorescent lights.
Check the following:
•
Make sure that the cable is connected to the Ethernet controller.
•
Make sure that the PCI system BIOS is current.
•
Reseat the adapter.
•
Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet adapter is also
assigned to another device in the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some devices do not
function well when they share an interrupt with a dissimilar PCI device. Try
changing the IRQ assigned to the Ethernet adapter or the other device.
Diagnostics
37
Table 2. Ethernet troubleshooting chart.
Ethernet controller problem
The Ethernet controller
stopped working without
apparent cause.
Suggested Action
Check the following:
•
Run diagnostics for the Ethernet controller.
•
Try a different connector on the hub.
•
Reinstall the device drivers. Refer to the operating-system documentation and to
the ServerGuide information.
Ethernet controller messages
The integrated Ethernet controller might display messages from the following device
drivers:
•
•
•
Novell™ NetWare™ or IntraNetWare Server ODI
NDIS Adapter for level 4.0 (Windows NT)
SCO™ UNIX LLI
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare server ODI
driver messages
This section provides explanations of the error messages for the Novell NetWare or
IntraNetWare server ODI driver, and suggested actions to resolve each problem.
PCNTNW-NW- The MSM is unable to parse a required custom keyword.
026
Explanation: The user entered an incorrect parameter keyword.
Action: Reload the driver using the correct keyword.
PCNTNW-NW- The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.
054
Explanation: The adapter did not respond when the driver tried to
initialize it.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet
controller is enabled, go to “Starting the diagnostic programs” on page
26 to run the diagnostic programs.
PCNTNW-NW- The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.
058
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting might not be valid or
the EEPROM information might be incorrect.
Action: Make sure the IRQ settings are correct in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program. for information on setting the
interrupt requests. If the IRQ settings are correct, go to “Starting the
diagnostic programs” on page 26 to run the diagnostic programs.
PCNTNW-NW- The cable might be disconnected from the adapter.
066
Explanation: The cable might be disconnected from the server Ethernet
port.
Action: Verify that a cable is connected to the Ethernet port.
Table 3. Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare ODI driver messages for the Ethernet
controller.
38
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
PCNTNW-NW- The matching virtual adapter could not be found.
071
Explanation: You tried to load another instance of the driver with a
different I/O address. This new adapter could not be found.
Action: Verify that you installed an IBM 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter
and make sure that the adapter is seated correctly. If the adapter is
seated correctly, go to “Starting the diagnostic programs” on page 26 to
run the diagnostic programs.
PCNTNW-NW- A resource tag is unavailable.
072
Explanation: The driver tried to allocate some resources that were not
available.
Action: Add more memory, or free some memory resources in the server.
Then, restart the server.
PCNTNW-NW- Unable to allocate memory
073
Explanation: The driver failed to allocate the memory needed for
normal operation.
Action: Add more memory, or free some memory resources in the server.
Then, restart the server.
PCNTNW-NW- The hardware interrupt cannot be set.
074
Explanation: An attempt was made to initialize a given hardware
interrupt. The attempt was not successful.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet
controller is enabled, go to “Starting the diagnostic programs” on page
26 to run the diagnostic programs.
If you have an Ethernet adapter installed, make sure that the adapter
does not share an IRQ with any other device.
PCNTNW-NW- The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) cannot be registered with
075 the Link Support Layer (LSL).
Explanation: An error occurred while the driver was trying to register
with the LSL.
Action: Check the version of the NetWare or IntraNetWare Operating
System. Make sure that this driver is correct for the version of NetWare
or IntraNetWare that you are using. Restart the server.
PCNTNW-NW- The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) did not initialize MSMTx
079 Free Count.
Explanation: The MSMTx Free Count is not initialized correctly.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, go to “Starting the
diagnostic programs” on page 26 to run the diagnostic programs.
PCNTNW-NW- The driver parameter block is too small.
086
Explanation: The driver parameter block is too small.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, go to “Starting the
diagnostic programs” on page 26 to run the diagnostic programs.
PCNTNW-NW- The media parameter block is too small.
087
Explanation: The driver media parameter block is too small.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, go to “Starting the
diagnostic programs” on page 26 to run the diagnostic programs.
Table 3. Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare ODI driver messages for the Ethernet
controller.
Diagnostics
39
PCNTNW-NW- The hardware configuration conflicts.
091
Explanation: You tried to load a new frame type for the existing
controller. The hardware assumptions made in doing so are incorrect.
This error can also occur if you try to specify a mode (such as,
redundancy) that conflicts with another specified mode.
Action: Make sure that your hardware configuration matches the
software settings.
PCNTNW-NW- The group bit in the node address override was cleared.
126
Explanation: The IEEE address has a group bit that indicates that an
address belongs to a group of stations. This bit is used only as a
destination address; it cannot be used as a source address. You tried to
enter a source address with this bit set. The driver cleared the group bit
of the source address.
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.
PCNTNW-NW- The local bit in the node address override was set.
127
Explanation: The local bit in the IEEE address format indicates that the
addresses are being managed locally. If you use the node address
override capabilities of this driver to enter a new address, the local bit
must be set. You entered an address without the local bit set. The driver
has set the local bit.
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.
PCNTNW-NW- The device was not found.
164
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller in the server.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet
controller is enabled, go to “Starting the diagnostic programs” on page
26 to run the diagnostic programs.
PCNTNW-NW- The device was not found at IOADDRESS.
165
Explanation: The Ethernet controller cannot be found at the I/O address
specified.
Action: The Ethernet controller does not require a parameter for the I/O
address. Remove the I/O address parameter.
PCNTNW-NW- PCI scan specified, device not found.
167
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI
bus.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the problem
persists, go to “Starting the diagnostic programs” on page 26 to run the
diagnostic programs.
PCNTNW-NW- The DMA parameter is not necessary for PCI device.
180
Explanation: The Ethernet controller does not require a DMA setting.
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.
Table 3. Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare ODI driver messages for the Ethernet
controller.
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) driver messages
This section contains the error messages for the NDIS 4.0 drivers. The explanation
and recommended action are included with each message.
40
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Table 4. NDIS (Windows NT) driver messages for the Ethernet controller.
PermaNet™ Server:
No Secondary Adapter Found. Grouping Mode is disabled.
Explanation: The failover option requires an adapter that is compatible with the device
driver of the Ethernet controller on the system board. No such adapter was found.
Action: Make sure the correct adapter is installed.
PermaNet Server:
Problem Occurs on the Primary Adapter. Switching over to the Secondary Adapter.
Explanation: The system detected a problem with the primary Ethernet connection and
has transferred all network traffic to the secondary Ethernet controller.
Action: identify the cause of the failure on the primary Ethernet connection. Restoring
the operational state of the primary connection will cause the network traffic to
automatically transfer to the primary Ethernet controller.
PermaNet Server:
Switching back to Primary Adapter.
Explanation: The primary Ethernet connection is now operating correctly. Network
traffic will automatically transfer to the primary Ethernet controller.
Action: None needed, message is for information only.
UNIX messages
This section provides descriptions of the Ethernet error messages for the SCO UNIX
LLI driver, and suggested actions to resolve each problem.
Table 5. UNIX LLI driver messages for the Ethernet controller.
pnt0-2
PCI search specified, PCI device not found!
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.
Action:
pnt0-6
•
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller
•
Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet controller is enabled, run the
diagnostic programs.
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during an interrupt. Please check the Streams
parameters.
Explanation: On a SunSoft Solaris system, this message indicates that the system is out of
Streams memory blocks.
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks. Modify the
interrupt request (IRQ) settings in the Configuration/Setup Utility program, or run the
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.
pnt0-7
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during reset. Please check the Streams parameters.
Explanation: The system is out of Streams memory blocks.
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks.
pnt0-11
Device not found!
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet controller is enabled, run
the diagnostic programs.
Diagnostics
41
Table 5. UNIX LLI driver messages for the Ethernet controller.
pnt0-12
Device failed checksum test!
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet controller is enabled, run
the diagnostic programs.
pnt0-13
add_intr_handler failed! Interrupts already enabled.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts
with other devices in the server.
Action: Modify the hardware settings.
pnt0-14
Cannot locate hardware.
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver cannot find any Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. If the Ethernet controller is enabled, run
the diagnostic programs.
pnt0-15
No more devices to open.
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver cannot find any more Ethernet controllers. Action:
Verify that additional IBM 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapters are present or replace the Ethernet
adapter that fails to respond. If the problem persists, run the diagnostic programs.
pnt0-17
Device fault...Reset initiated!
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver has been reset due to a device fault.
Action: Verify that additional IBM 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapters are present or replace the
Ethernet adapter that fails to respond. If the problem persists, run the diagnostic programs.
pnt0-19
IRQ found for PCnet hardware does not match space.c (or pnt.conf)!
Explanation: This is a warning message referring to the interrupt request (IRQ) that the SunSoft
Solaris driver found in the system.
Action: Ignore this message if you are sure that this is what you want to do. Otherwise, run the
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings
pnt0-20
add_intr_handler failed! Unknown interrupt type.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts
with other devices in the server. Action:
pnt0-21
•
Modify the hardware settings.
•
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range interrupt number.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts
with other devices in the server. Action:
pnt0-22
•
Modify the hardware settings.
•
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range IPL.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts
with other devices in the server.
Action: Modify the hardware settings. Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another
Ethernet controller.
42
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Table 5. UNIX LLI driver messages for the Ethernet controller.
pnt0-23
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already occupied.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts
with other devices in the server.
Action: Modify the hardware settings.
pnt0-24
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already shared at different IPL.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts
with other devices in the server. Action:
pnt0-26
•
Modify the hardware settings.
•
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
The DMA number is not necessary for PCI device.
Explanation: The IBM 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter does not require a DMA setting.
Action: Edit the SPACE.C file to delete the DMA parameter.
pnt0-29
The IRQ number is already in use.
Explanation: The specified I/O address is already in use.
Action: Run the NETCONFIG program to modify the hardware settings.
pnt0-31
I/O address is not necessary for the PCI device.
Explanation: The I/O address specified is not required.
Action: Remove the assigned I/O address specified for the Ethernet controller.
Diagnostics
43
44
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Configuring the server
The following configuration programs are provided with the server:
•
Configuration/Setup Utility
This program is part of the basic input/output system (BIOS) code that comes with
the server. You can use this program to configure serial and parallel port
assignments, change interrupt request (IRQ) settings, change the drive startup
sequence, set the date and time, and set passwords. See “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program” for more information.
•
SCSISelect Utility
With the built-in SCSISelect Utility program, you can configure the devices
attached to the integrated SCSI controller. See “Using the SCSISelect utility
program” on page 51 for more information.
•
ServeRAID programs
The ServeRAID programs come with the optional ServeRAID adapters and with
server models that have a ServeRAID adapter preinstalled. If the server has a
ServeRAID adapter installed, you must use the ServeRAID Configuration
program to define and configure the disk-array subsystem before you install the
operating system. See “Using IBM ServeRAID” on page 117 for more detailed
information.
•
ServerGuide CDs
The ServerGuide CDs include software setup and installation tools specifically
designed for IBM xSeries servers. You can use these CDs during the initial
installation of the server to configure the server hardware and simplify the
network operating system installation. The ServerGuide CDs also contain a
collection of application programs, which you can install after the server is up and
running.
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility program
This section provides the instructions needed to start the Configuration/Setup Utility
program and descriptions of the menu choices available.
Starting the Configuration/Setup Utility program
To start the Configuration/Setup Utility program:
1.
Turn on the server and watch the monitor screen.
2.
When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
Note: If you have set both levels of passwords (user and administrator), you
must enter the administrator password to access the full
Configuration/Setup menu.
3.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
45
Choices available from the Configuration/Setup main
menu
From the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, you can select settings that you
want to change. The Configuration/Setup Utility main menu is similar to the
following:
IBM Server Setup - © IBM Corporation 2001
Configuration/Setup Utility
System Summary
System Information
Devices and I/O Ports
Date and Time
System Security
Start Options
Advanced Setup
Error Logs
Save Settings
Restore Settings
Load Default Settings
Exit Setup
<F1> Help
<Esc> Exit
< > < > Move
<Enter> Select
Notes:
1.
You can press F1 to display Help information for a selected menu item.
2.
The choices on some menus might differ slightly, depending on the BIOS version
in the server.
Descriptions of the choices available from the main menu are as follows:
•
System Summary
Select this choice to display configuration information. This includes the type and
speed of the microprocessors and the amount of memory installed.
Changes that you make to configuration settings appear on this summary screen.
You cannot edit the fields.
This choice appears on both the full and limited Configuration/Setup Utility
menus.
•
System Information
Select this choice to display information about the server. Changes that you make
on other menus might appear on this summary screen. You cannot edit any
fields. The System Information choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
— Product Data
Select this choice to view system information, such as the machine type and
model, the server serial number, and the revision level or issue date of the
BIOS stored in the flash electronically erasable programmable ROM
(EEPROM).
— System Card Data
Select this choice to view vital product data (VPD) for some server
components.
46
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
•
Devices and I/O Ports
Select this choice to view or change the assignments for devices and input/output
ports. This choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu.
•
Date and Time
Select this choice to set the system date and time and to change the system time
sent to the Advanced System Management Processor (service processor) when the
server is started. This choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
The system time is in a 24-hour format: hour:minute:second.
You can set a time delta to be added or subtracted from the system time that is
sent to the service processor (Advanced System Management Processor) each
time the server is started. Use the number keys to enter the hours and minutes
and + or −to add or subtract from the system time. If you want the system clock
time to be the same as the Advanced System Management Processor clock time,
leave the value set at its default of 0.
•
System Security
Select this choice to set passwords or a system owner’s name. This choice appears
only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
You can implement two levels of password protection:
— Power-on Password
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. See “Using
passwords” on page 49 for more information.
— Administrator Password
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password.
Attention:
If an administrator password is set and then forgotten, it cannot be
overridden or removed. You must replace the I/O Legacy board.
The administrator password provides access to all choices on the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. You can set, change, or delete both
the administrator and power-on passwords, and allow a power-on password
to be changed by the user.
See“Using passwords” on page 49 for more information.
— System Owner’s Name
Select this choice to specify a system owner's name, which will display during
POST. You can remove or change the name only from the System Security
menu. You can use any combination of up to 16 characters for the system
owner's name.
•
Start Options
Select this choice to view or change the start options. This choice appears only on
the full Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. Start options take effect when
you start the server.
You can select keyboard operating characteristics, such as the keyboard speed.
You also can specify whether the keyboard number lock starts on or off. You also
can enable the server to run without a diskette drive, monitor, or keyboard.
The server uses a startup sequence to determine the device from which the
operating system loads. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for a startable diskette in the diskette drive, then checks the hard disk
drive in bay 1, and then checks a network adapter.
Configuring the server
47
You also can select which PCI SCSI adapter is given boot precedence. The first
drive that is attached to the selected adapter will be assigned drive number 80L
and the operating system will start from that drive. The default for boot
precedence is Disabled. The range of choices depends upon the number of PCI
SCSI adapters installed in the server.
You can enable a virus-detection test that checks for changes in the master boot
record at startup. You also can choose to run POST in the enhanced mode or the
quick mode.
•
Advanced Setup
Select this choice to change values for advanced hardware features, such as cache
control, and PCI configuration. This choice appears only on the full
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
A warning message appears above the choices on this menu to alert you that the
system might malfunction if these options are configured incorrectly. Follow the
instructions on the screen carefully.
— Processor Serial Number Access
Select this choice to identify if the microprocessor serial number in the
microprocessor is readable.
— Core Chipset Control
Select this choice to modify settings that control features of the core chip set.
Attention: Changes here must only be made by an IBM authorized service
representative.
— Cache Control
Select this choice to enable or disable the microprocessor cache. In addition,
you can define the microprocessor cache type as write-back (WB) or writethrough (WT). Selecting write-back mode will provide the maximum system
performance.
— PCI Slot/Device Information
Select this choice to view and identify system resources used by PCI devices.
PCI devices automatically communicate with the server configuration
information. This usually results in automatic configuration of a PCI device.
Attention: You must use the menu selections to save custom settings for the
PCI Slot/Device Information choice. The save, restore and load default
settings choices on the main menu of the Configuration/Setup Utility do not
save the PCI Slot/Device Information settings.
After making changes, select:
–
Save and exit the PCI Utility to save the changes and return to the
Advanced Setup choice.
–
Exit the PCI Utility without saving changes to ignore the changes,
restore the previous settings, and return to the Advanced Setup choice.
— PCI Device Control allows you to enable or disable the integrated SCSI,
video, and Ethernet controllers. You can also enable or disable PCI slots from
this menu.
48
–
The default setting is Enable for all the controllers and PCI slots. If you
select Disable, the system will not configure the disabled device and the
operating system will not see the device. (This is equivalent to
unplugging the device.)
–
If the on-board SCSI controller is disabled and no other controller and
mass storage device are installed, operating system startup cannot occur.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
–
If the video controller is disabled and no video adapter is installed, the
server will have no video capability. However, turning the server off and
on three times without completing POST results in a default startup that
enables video again.
— Memory Settings
Select this choice to manually disable or enable a bank of memory.
If a memory error is detected during POST or memory configuration, the
server can automatically disable the failing memory bank and continue
operating with reduced memory capacity. If this occurs, you must manually
enable the memory bank after the problem is corrected. Select Memory
Settings from the Advanced Setup menu, use the arrow keys to highlight the
bank that you want to enable; then, use the arrow keys to select Enable.
•
System Service Processor Settings
Select this choice to enable or disable power supply redundancy monitoring.
•
Event/Error Logs
Select this choice to view or clear error logs.
— Select Clear error logs to clear the error or event log.
— Select POST Error Log to view the three most recent error codes and
messages that the system generated during POST.
— Select System Event/Error Log to view the system event/error log. The
system event/error log contains all the system error and warning messages
that the system has generated. You can use the arrow keys to move between
pages in the system event/error log.
•
Save Settings
Select this choice to save the customized settings.
•
Restore Settings
Select this choice to delete the changes and restore the previous settings.
•
Load Default Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes and restore the factory settings.
•
Exit Setup
If you have made any changes, the program will prompt you to save the changes
or exit without saving the changes.
Using passwords
The System Security choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility
menu. After you select this choice, you can implement two levels of protection:
power-on password and administrator password.
Power-on password
After you set a power-on password, you can enable the unattended-start mode. This
locks the keyboard and mouse, but allows the server to start the operating system.
The keyboard and mouse remain locked until you enter the correct password.
You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for the
power-on password. Keep a record of the password in a secure place. If you forget
the power-on password, you can regain access to the server through one of the
following methods:
Configuring the server
49
•
If an administrator password is set, enter the administrator password at the
power-on prompt. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and change the
power-on password.
•
Change the position of the password override switch as described in “Setting the
password override switch:”.
•
Remove the battery and then install the battery.
Setting the password override switch:: When a power-on password is set, POST
does not complete until you enter the password. If you forget the power-on password,
you can regain access to the server through either of the following methods:
•
Enter the administrator password at the power-on prompt, if an administrator
password has been set. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and
change the power-on password. See “Power-on password” on page 49
•
Change the position of the jumper on J48 to bypass the power-on password check.
You can then start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and change the
power-on password. See “Processor board component locations” on page 55 for
the location of J48.
Administrator password
Select this choice to set an administrator password. The administrator password
provides access to all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. You can
set, change, or delete both the administrator and power-on passwords, and allow a
power-on password to be changed by the user.
Attention: If an administrator password is set and then forgotten, it cannot be
overridden or removed. You must replace the I/O Legacy board.
The following table provides a summary of the password features.
Table 6. Power-on and administrator password features.
Type of password
Power-on password
•
•
Administrator
password
Administrator and
power-on password
50
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
•
Results
Enter the password to complete the system startup.
All choices are available on the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
No password is required to start the system.
•
Enter the password to access the Configuration/Setup Utility
program.
•
All choices are available on the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
You can enter either password to complete the system startup.
•
•
The administrator password provides access to all choices on
the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. You can set,
change, or delete both the administrator and power-on
passwords, and allow a power-on password to be changed by
the user.
•
The power-on password provides access to a limited set of
choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. This
limited access might include changing or deleting the poweron password.
Using the SCSISelect utility program
SCSISelect is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility program that you can use
to:
•
View the default SCSI IDs
•
Locate and correct configuration conflicts
•
Perform a low-level format on a SCSI hard disk
The following sections provide the instructions needed to start the SCSISelect Utility
and descriptions of the menu choices available.
Note: If the server has a RAID adapter installed, use the configuration method
supplied with the RAID adapter to view or change SCSI settings for RAID
attached devices.
Starting the SCSISelect utility program
To start the SCSISelect utility program:
1.
Turn on the server.
2.
When the <<< Press <CTRL><A> for SCSISelect™ Utility! >>> prompt appears,
press Ctrl+A.
Note: If an administrator password has been set, a prompt appears asking you to
enter the password to start the SCSISelect Utility program.
3.
When prompted, select either channel A (external) or channel B (internal).
4.
Use the arrow keys to select a choice from the menu.
5.
•
Press Esc to return to the previous menu.
•
Press the F5 key to switch between color and monochrome modes (if the
monitor permits).
Follow the instructions on the screen to change the settings of the selected items;
then, press Enter.
Choices available from the SCSISelect menu
The following choices appear on the SCSISelect Utility menu:
•
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings
Select this choice to view or change the SCSI controller settings. To reset the SCSI
controller to its default values, press F6; then, follow the instructions that appear
on the screen.
You can view or change the following controller settings:
— Host Adapter SCSI ID
Select this choice to view the SCSI controller ID, normally 7.
— SCSI Parity Checking
Select this choice to view the assigned value of Enabled.
— Host Adapter SCSI Termination
Select this choice to view the assigned value of Automatic.
— Boot Device Options
Select this choice to configure startable device parameters. Before you can
make updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you
want to configure.
Configuring the server
51
— SCSI Device Configuration
Select this choice to configure SCSI device parameters. Before you can make
updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you want to
configure.
Note: The Maximum Sync Transfer Rate represents the transfer rate for Ultra
SCSI devices.
–
The transfer rate for Ultra-3 SCSI LVD devices is 160.0
–
The transfer rate for Ultra-2 SCSI LVD devices is 80.0
–
The transfer rate for Fast SCSI devices is 20.0
— Advanced Configuration Options
Select this choice to view or change the settings for advanced configuration
options. These options include enabling support for large hard disk drives
and support for drives with UltraSCSI speeds.
•
SCSI Disk Utilities
Select this choice to view the SCSI IDs that are assigned to each device or to
format a SCSI device.
To use the utility program, select a drive from the list. Read the screens carefully
before making a selection.
Note: If you press Ctrl+A before the selected drives are ready, an Unexpected
SCSI Command Failure screen might appear. Restart the server and watch
the SCSISelect messages as each drive spins up. After the drive that you
want to view or format spins up, press Ctrl+A.
•
Format Disk
Attention: The Low-Level Format program erases all data and programs.
Select this choice to perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive. Depending
on the hard disk drive capacity, the Low-Level Format program could take up to
two hours.
Use the Low-Level Format program:
— When you are installing software that requires a low-level format
— When you get recurring messages from the diagnostic tests directing you to
run the Low-Level Format program on the hard disk drive
— As a last resort before replacing a failing hard disk drive
Note: If the server has a PCI RAID adapter installed, refer to the RAID adapter
documentation for instructions for performing low-level formats on hard
disk drives attached to the adapter.
To start the Low-Level Format program:
1.
If the hard disk is working, make a backup copy of all the files and programs
on the hard disk drive. (See the operating system information for
instructions.)
2.
Select Format Disk; then, follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: Hard disks normally contain more tracks than their stated capacity (to
allow for defective tracks). A message appears on the screen if the
defect limit is reached. If this happens, replace the hard disk drive.
52
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Installing options
This chapter provides instructions to help you add options to the server.
Note: The illustrations in this book are similar to the server; details might vary.
Major components of the xSeries 250
The orange color on components and labels in your server identifies hot-swap or hotplug components. This means that you can install or remove the components while
the system is running, provided that your system is configured to support this
function. For complete information about installing or removing a hot-swap or hotplug component, see the information provided in the detailed procedures in this
document.
The blue color on components and labels indicates touch points where a component
can be gripped, a latch moved, and so on.
Power backplane
Shuttle
SCSI backplane
Media-bay bezel
Power supply
Removable-media
drive
Hot-swap
drive
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
Filler Panel
Fan assembly #1
53
Shuttle
cover
Terminator card
Memory
module
Memory board
VRM
Fan
assembly
#2
Fan
assembly
#3
Shuttle
Microprocessor
I/O board
Fan
assembly
#4
Component locations
This section provides illustrations of the I/O board, processor board, and memory
board component locations.
I/O board component locations
The following illustration shows the location of the input/output (I/O) connectors on
the I/O board.
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.
54
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Power
backplane
Processor
board
Keyboard
Mouse
Video port
USB 1 and
USB 2 port
Ethernet port
Management
port
Serial
port A
Serial
port B
Parallel port
ASM
interconnect
SCSI
external
Processor board component locations
The following illustration shows the location of the LEDs, connectors, and jumpers on
the processor board.
Processor board LEDs
The following illustration shows the location of the LEDs.
Installing options
55
VRM 1 error LED
(CR6)
Microprocessor 1
CR9)
error LED ((Cr9)
VRM 2 error LED
(CR7)
Microprocessor 2
CR3)
error LED ((Cr3)
VRM 3 error LED
(CR5)
Microprocessor 3
CR8)
error LED ((Cr8)
Microprocessor 4
CR4)
error LED ((Cr4)
VRM 4 error LED
(CR10)
PCI slot LEDs
Battery
Processor board connectors
The following illustration shows the connectors.
Microprocessor 1
Connector (J2)
VRM 1 Connector
Microprocessor 2
Connector (J3)
VRM 2 Connector
Microprocessor 3
Connector (J4)
VRM 3 Connector
Reserved (J8 and J9)
Microprocessor 4
Connector (J5)
VRM 4 Connector
Memory board
Connector
PCI Slot 1 and 2
(on PCI bus A)
PCI Slot 3-6
(on PCI bus B)
56
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Battery
Processor board jumpers
The following illustration shows the jumpers.
3.3 V standby
power for slot 2
(J20)
Advanced
System
Management
Processor reset
jumper block
(J59)
Jumper block
(J10-J16)
Flash ROM pageswap jumper
block (J56)
Power-on
control jumper
block (J23)
Power-on
password
override jumper
block (J48)
3.3 V standby
power for slot 1
(J47)
Battery
Microprocessor core-frequency
selection jumper block (J13-J16)
Reserved (J10)
Reserved (J12)
Reserved (J11)
Memory board component locations
The illustrations in this section show certain locations on the memory board.
Memory board connectors
The following illustration shows the location of the DIMM connectors on the memory
board.
Installing options
57
Connector 1(J1)
Connector 9 (J9)
Connector 2 (J2)
Connector 10 (J10)
Connector 3 (J3)
Connector 11 (J11)
Connector 4 (J4)
Connector 12 (J12)
Connector 5 (J5)
Connector 13 (J13)
Connector 14 (J14)
Connector 6 (J6)
Connector 15 (J15)
Connector 7 (J7)
Connector 16 (J16)
Connector 8 (J8)
Memory board LED locations
The following illustration shows the location of the error LEDs on the memory board.
DIMM 1 error
LED (CR4)
DIMM 9 error
LED (CR13)
DIMM 2 error
LED (CR5)
DIMM 10 error
LED (CR12)
DIMM 3 error
LED (CR2)
DIMM 11 error
LED (CR15)
DIMM 4 error
LED (CR1)
DIMM 12 error
LED (CR16)
DIMM 5 error
LED (CR6)
DIMM 13 error
LED (CR11)
DIMM 6 error
LED (CR3)
DIMM 14 error
LED (CR14)
DIMM 7 error
LED (CR7)
DIMM 15 error
LED (CR10)
DIMM 8 error
LED (CR8)
DIMM 16 error
LED (CR9)
Before you begin
Before you begin to install options in the server, read the following information:
58
•
Become familiar with the safety and handling guidelines provided in “Safety
information” on page 180, and “Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive
devices” on page 183. These guidelines will help you work safely while working
with the server or options.
•
You do not need to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power
supplies, hot-swap drives, hot-swap fans, or hot-plug PCI adapters.
•
The orange color on components and labels in the server identifies hot-swap or
hot-plug components. This means that you can install or remove the component
while the system is running, provided that the system is configured to support
this function.
•
The blue color on components and labels identifies touch points where you can
grip a component, move a latch, and so on.
•
Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for the server, monitor, and any other options that you intend to install.
•
Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
•
For a list of supported options for the Netfinity 7600, refer to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat on the World Wide Web.
Working inside the server with the power on
The server is designed with features that make it highly available. These features are
hot-add and hot-plug devices. Hot-plug devices allow you to replace the device
without turning off the server. Hot-add devices allow you to add an identical device
without turning off the server. In the past you would need to turn off the server and
disconnect power to perform these operations. With the hot-plug features, you can
remove the top cover of the server with the power on.
The server supports hot plug, hot add, and hot swap devices and is designed to
operate safely while turned on with the top cover removed. The server is designed to
protect you and the server. Follow these guidelines when you work inside a server
that is turned on:
•
Avoid loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts before
working inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working inside the
server.
•
Do not allow your necktie to hang inside the server.
•
Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist
watches.
•
Remove items from your shirt pocket (such as pens or pencils) that could fall into
the server as you lean over it.
•
Take care to avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hair pins, or
screws, into the server.
Removing the server top cover and bezel
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
Removing the top cover
Top cover
Captive screws
Installing options
59
To remove the server top cover:
1.
Loosen the two thumbscrews on the back edge of the top cover.
2.
Slide the top cover slightly toward the rear of the server. Lift the cover off the
server and set the cover aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the top cover before turning
on the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time
(over 30 minutes) with the top cover removed might damage server
components.
Removing the media-bay bezel
Media-bay bezel
To remove the media-bay bezel:
1.
Release the two tabs at the bottom edge of the media-bay bezel and pull the
bottom of the bezel slightly away from the server.
2.
Pull the media-bay bezel down to release the two tabs at the top edge of the bezel.
Store the bezel in a safe place.
Removing the front trim bezel
∼1∼
60
Side tabs
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
∼2∼
Bottom tabs
1.
Release the three tabs on the right side of the front trim bezel and release the two
tabs on the left side of the bezel.
2.
Gently separate the bezel partly from the server.
3.
Release the two bottom tabs on the bezel and lift the bezel away from the server.
Working with adapters
You can install up to six PCI adapters in the expansion connectors on the processor
board. All six of the slots are peripheral component interconnect (PCI) expansion
slots.
The server comes with an integrated super video graphics array (SVGA) video
controller, which is not removable. If you want to disable this controller and use a
video adapter instead, you can install a video adapter in an expansion slot. When you
install a PCI video adapter, the server BIOS automatically disables the integrated
video controller.
Note: Video adapters are supported in all six PCI slots.
The following illustration shows the location of the 64-bit PCI expansion slots on the
processor board.
Note: The illustrations in this book might differ slightly from your hardware.
Non-hot-plug PCI slots
1-2 (on PCI bus A)
External Attention LEDs for
hot-plug slots
Internal Attention LEDs for
hot-plug slots
Hot-plug PCI slots
3-6 (on PCI bus B)
Power LEDs
for hot-plug slots
Adapter considerations
Before you continue with the adapter-installation procedure:
Installing options
61
•
Review the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions given in this chapter. If you need to
change the switch or jumper settings on the adapter, follow the instructions that
come with the adapter documentation.
•
Slots 3 through 6 support 5.0V, 3.3V, and universal PCI adapters.
Note: Universal PCI adapters support both 3.3 V and 5.0 V operation.
•
Slots 1 and 2 support 3.3 V and universal non-hot-swap PCI adapters only.
•
The server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI adapters.
Because of this technique, you can install a variety of PCI adapters that currently
do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
•
The system scans PCI slots 1 through 6 to assign system resources; then the
system starts (boots) the PCI devices in the following order: processor board
devices, slots 1 and 2, and then slots 3 through 6.
•
The performance of the PCI adapters depends on the types of adapters in the
system.
Installing a hot-plug adapter (slots 3 through 6)
Refer to the following illustration to install a hot-plug PCI adapter.
Note: The illustrations in this book may be slightly different from your server.
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
•
Read the documentation that comes with the option.
Adapter
retention latch
Adapter retention latch
Adapter
To install a hot-plug PCI adapter:
62
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Tab
Attention: Do not remove a hot-plug adapter before performing the operatingsystem-defined procedure for disabling the hot-plug PCI slot that
contains the adapter. Failure to do so might cause the system to lock up.
Refer to the operating system documentation.
1.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
2.
Determine which expansion slot you will use for the adapter.
Note: You can install hot-plug PCI adapters in PCI slots 3-6 only.
3.
Disable the selected PCI slot from the operating system. (Refer to the
documentation that comes with the operating system for information about
disabling a hot-plug PCI slot.) Disabling the PCI slot turns off the power light for
that PCI slot.
Attention: Make sure the power light for the hot-plug PCI slot is off before you
continue with the next step.
4.
Remove the expansion-slot cover:
a.
Rotate the adapter retention latch counterclockwise.
b.
Lift the tab covering the top of the expansion-slot cover and then remove the
expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place for future use.
c.
Press on the rear adapter retention latch (near the hard disk drives) as
indicated by the arrow on the latch and lift it to the open position.
Attention: You must install expansion-slot covers on all empty slots. This
maintains the electromagnetic emissions characteristics of the system and
ensures proper cooling of system components.
5.
Refer to the documentation that comes with the adapter for any cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route any cables before you install the
adapter.
6.
Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the
adapter. If you need to put down the adapter, place the adapter,
component-side up, on a flat, static-protective surface.
7.
Install the adapter:
a.
Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and align it with
the expansion slot on the processor board.
b.
Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is
completely and correctly seated in the processor-board connector.
Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the processor board
or the adapter.
c.
Lower the tab over the top corner of the adapter. Rotate the adapter retention
latch clockwise until it snaps into place.
d. Lower the rear adapter retention latch (near the hard disk drives) over the top
of the adapter and press on the indentation on the latch until the latch snaps
into place.
8.
Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
9.
Enable the PCI slot from the operating system. (Refer to the documentation that
comes with the operating system for information about enabling a hot-plug PCI
slot.) Make sure that the power light for the hot-plug PCI slot is on.
10. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go
to“Completing the installation” on page 91.
Installing options
63
Installing a non-hot-plug PCI adapter (slots 1 and 2)
The following illustration shows how to install a non-hot-plug PCI adapter.
Note:
The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
Adapter
retention latch
Adapter retention latch
Adapter
Tab
To install a non-hot-plug PCI adapter:
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid
damage from static electricity.
1.
Turn off the server; then, disconnect the power cords.
2.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
3.
Determine which expansion slot you will use for the adapter.
Note:
4.
PCI slots 1 and 2 support non-hot-plug PCI adapters only.
Remove the expansion-slot cover:
a.
Rotate the adapter retention latch counterclockwise.
b.
Lift the tab covering the top of the expansion-slot cover and then remove the
expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place for future use.
c.
Press on the rear adapter retention latch (near the hard disk drives) as
indicated by the arrow on the latch and lift it to the open position.
Attention: You must install expansion-slot covers on all empty slots. This
maintains the electromagnetic emissions characteristics of the system and
ensures proper cooling of system components.
64
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
5.
Refer to the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route any cables before you install the
adapter.
6.
Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the
adapter. If you need to put down the adapter, place the adapter, component-side
up, on a flat, static-protective surface.
7.
Install the adapter:
a.
Carefully grasp the adapter by its top edge or upper corners, and align it with
the expansion slot on the processor board.
b.
Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is
completely and correctly seated in the expansion slot. Incomplete insertion
might cause damage to the processor board or the adapter.
c.
Lower the tab over the top corner of the adapter. Rotate the adapter retention
latch clockwise until it snaps into place.
d. Lower the rear adapter retention latch (near the hard disk drives) over the top
of the adapter and press on the indentation on the latch until the latch snaps
into place.
8.
Connect any needed cables to the adapter and reconnect the power cords that you
disconnected in step 1 on page 64.
9.
If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 91.
Installing options
65
Cabling example for the ServeRAID adapter
You can install an optional IBM ServeRAID™ adapter in your server to control the
internal hot-swap hard-disk drives; that is, to enable you to configure the internal hotswap hard disk drives into disk arrays. Refer to your ServeRAID adapter option
documentation for additional information on:
•
Installing a ServeRAID adapter in your server
•
Connecting the SCSI cable to a ServeRAID adapter
•
ServeRAID adapters and controllers
Select the PCI slot where you want to install the ServeRAID adapter. Before you
install the ServeRAID adapter, verify that it is compatible with the PCI slot that you
selected. Some ServeRAID adapters are not compatible with PCI slots 1 and 2. See
“Adapter considerations” on page 61 for additional information on PCI slots.
The following procedure describes the cable routing that is necessary when you install
a ServeRAID adapter. You can also cable a ServeRAID adapter to external hard disk
drives.
Notes:
1.
The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.
2.
Refer to the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling
instructions.
3.
Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with your server and
options. Use these identifiers to connect the cables to the correct connectors. For
example, the hard disk drive cables are labeled "HDD".
To cable the ServeRAID adapter:
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
1.
Determine the number of SCSI channels that you want to use on the ServeRAID
adapter. If you are connecting to more than two SCSI channels, you might need to
purchase additional SCSI cables. Consult your IBM marketing representative or
reseller for additional information on the number and types of cables that your
server configuration requires.
As shipped, your server comes with two SCSI cables attached to the SCSI
backplane (see “LVD SCSI backplane” on page 72 for details):
•
One end of the first SCSI cable is attached to the SCSI channel A connector on
the SCSI backplane, and the other end is attached to the power backplane.
•
One end of the second SCSI cable is attached to the SCSI channel B connector
on the SCSI backplane. The other end of this cable is folded and restrained
with a clamp.
If you want to connect all of the hot-swap hard disk drives to one channel, you
must install an optional SCSI repeater card as described in “SCSI repeater card
installation” on page 75.
66
2.
Turn off the server; then, disconnect the power cords.
3.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
4.
If you have not yet installed the ServeRAID adapter, install it now. Depending on
your server configuration, see the beginning of this section for instructions on
installing a hot-plug or non-hot-plug adapter; then, return here. Otherwise,
continue with the next step.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
5.
Disconnect the shuttle:
a.
Disengage the retaining levers by pressing inward.
b.
Move the retaining levers back to the unlocked position.
Retaining lever
(unlocked position)
c.
Slide the shuttle toward the rear of the server until it stops.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the shuttle from the server.
6.
Disconnect the SCSI cable from the SCSI connector on the power backplane.
SCSI connector on
power backplane
Installing options
67
7.
Route one end of the SCSI cable through the cable retaining clips on the SCSI
backplane.
Handle
Cable retaining
clips
Backplane
Retention clips
Guides
SCSI channel
A connector
Power cable
connector
SCSI channel
B connector
Retention clips
68
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
8.
Attach one end of the SCSI cable to the selected internal SCSI channel connector
on the ServeRAID adapter. Make sure that the other end of the SCSI cable is
attached to the appropriate channel connector on the SCSI backplane.
Attention: When you route the SCSI cable, do the following:
•
•
•
Do not block the ventilated space in front of the fan assembly.
Do not place the SCSI cable fold on top of the fan assembly.
Do not route the SCSI cable over the memory board assembly.
The following illustration shows how to route one SCSI cable to the ServeRAID
adapter.
SCSI cable
ServeRAID adapter
SCSI connector on
power backplane
SCSI connector on
hard disk drive
backplane
Installing options
69
9.
If you are connecting to two SCSI channels, repeat step 7 on page 68 and step 8 on
page 69 for the second channel on the SCSI backplane. The following illustration
is a top-down view that shows how to route two SCSI cables to the ServeRAID
adapter in PCI slot 1.
SCSI cables
2
Cable
retaining
clip
3
SCSI
connectors
on ServeRAID
adapter
70
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
10. Connect the shuttle.
Retaining lever
(unlocked position)
Retaining lever
(locked position)
Pin
Pin
a.
Align the two shuttle pins with the holes on each side of the rear of the
chassis, and disengage the retaining levers from the notches on the chassis.
b.
Move the retaining levers toward the front of the server and secure the
retaining levers in the horizontal (locked) position.
11. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 91.
Installing options
71
LVD SCSI backplane
The server contains hardware that enables you to replace a failed hard disk drive
without turning off the server. Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing to
operate your system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed. These drives are
known as hot-swap drives. The hot-swap drives are attached to a hot-swap hard disk
drive backplane. The backplane is a printed circuit board behind the drive bays. For
more information on drive bays and drive installation, see “Installing internal drives”
on page 79.
As shipped, the LVD SCSI hot-swap hard disk drive backplane supports a split, dualchannel configuration. You can install a maximum of 10 slim-high, hot-swap hard
disk drives. You can attach five drives to each half of the backplane. These drives must
be low voltage differential (LVD) hard disk drives that operate at 160 MB per second
or lower.
You can configure the channels on the SCSI backplane in one of two ways:
•
You can configure each SCSI channel (bus) independently. This is the standard
backplane configuration. In this configuration:
— The hard disk drives in the upper half of the backplane are attached to
channel A through a SCSI cable that comes attached to the SCSI backplane.
— The hard disk drives in the lower half of the backplane are attached to
channel B through a second optional SCSI cable. One end of this second SCSI
cable comes attached to the SCSI channel B connector on the backplane. The
other end of this cable is folded and restrained with a clamp.
When you are installing hot-swap hard disk drives in the standard backplane
configuration, attach the first five to channel A; then, attach the remainder to
channel B. Refer to the illustration in this section for the SCSI channel connector
locations.
•
You can choose to configure the SCSI backplane as a single 10-drive SCSI channel.
To do this, you must install an optional SCSI repeater card as described in “SCSI
repeater card installation” on page 75.
Notes:
1.
The LVD SCSI backplane is also known as the SCSI backplane or the hot-swap
hard disk drive backplane.
2.
Table 14 on page 98 lists the SCSI identifiers (IDs) for the LVD SCSI backplane and
the hot-swap hard disk drives that are attached to SCSI channels A and B.
3.
Carefully route all cables so that they do not become damaged.
4.
Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with your server and
options. Use these identifiers to attach the cables to the correct connectors. For
example, the hard disk drive cables are labeled "HDD".
5.
For information on cabling options and using the LVD SCSI backplane, refer to
the documentation that comes with the option kit.
6.
For additional information on cabling the ServeRAID adapter, see “Cabling
example for the ServeRAID adapter” on page 66.
7.
The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your hardware.
LVD SCSI backplane removal
72
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
The following illustration shows the main SCSI backplane component locations.
Handle
Cable retaining
clips
Backplane
Retention clips
Guides
SCSI channel
A connector
Power cable
connector
SCSI channel
B connector
Retention clips
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
To remove the LVD SCSI backplane, perform the following actions:
1.
Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect all power cords and
external cables; then, remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on
page 59).
2.
If a ServeRAID adapter is installed in the server, disconnect the SCSI cable from
the adapter (see “Cabling example for the ServeRAID adapter” on page 66).
3.
Disconnect the shuttle:
a.
Disengage the retaining levers by pressing inward.
b.
Move the retaining levers back to the unlocked position.
Installing options
73
Retaining lever
(unlocked position)
c.
Slide the shuttle toward the rear of the server until it stops.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the shuttle from the server.
4.
Remove fan assembly 1 from the server (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan” on page
90).
5.
Disconnect the hot-swap hard disk drives from the corresponding SCSI backplane
connectors; then, slide the drives forward.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the drives from the server.
74
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
6.
Remove the SCSI backplane from the server:
a.
Lift the SCSI backplane guides from the corresponding slots on the server;
then, slide the SCSI backplane upward.
b.
Disconnect the power cable from the SCSI backplane.
c.
Disconnect the SCSI cables from the channel A and B connectors on the SCSI
backplane.
d. Lift the SCSI backplane from the server.
7.
To install the SCSI backplane, reverse the above steps, making sure that the SCSI
backplane guides are aligned with the corresponding slots on the server.
8.
If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 91.
SCSI repeater card installation
You must install an optional SCSI repeater card to connect all of your internal hotswap hard disk drives to the same SCSI channel.
The following illustration shows the rear connectors on the optional SCSI repeater
card, as viewed from the rear of the server.
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
SCSI repeater
card cable
connector
SCSI cable
connector
Installing options
75
To install a SCSI repeater card:
Attention: When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid
damage from static electricity.
1.
Remove the LVD SCSI backplane (see “LVD SCSI backplane removal” on page
72).
2.
Touch the static-protective package that contains the repeater card option to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the repeater card option from
the package.
Note: If necessary, refer to the documentation that comes with the repeater card
option kit to assemble the repeater card option.
3.
Connect the repeater card option to the SCSI backplane:
a.
Align the corresponding connectors on the repeater card and the SCSI
backplane. The corresponding screw holes on the repeater card and the SCSI
backplane will automatically align.
Backplane
Retention clips
SCSI repeater card
screws
4.
76
b.
Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to connect the repeater card to the SCSI
backplane with the two screws from the repeater card option kit.
c.
Secure the repeater card with the retention clips on the SCSI channel A
connector on the SCSI backplane.
A short SCSI cable comes with the repeater card option kit.
a.
Connect one end of this cable to the repeater card.
b.
Connect the other end of the cable to the SCSI channel B connector on the
SCSI backplane.
c.
Secure both cable ends with the retention clips on the SCSI connectors.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
SCSI backplane
SCSI repeater card
SCSI cable to
power backplane
SCSI repeater
card cable
Installing options
77
5.
Reinstall the SCSI backplane in the server:
a.
Reconnect the power cable to the SCSI backplane.
b.
Align the SCSI backplane guides with the corresponding slots on the server.
c.
Slide the SCSI backplane into the server.
d. Connect one end of the SCSI cable to the repeater card.
SCSI
backplane
SCSI
repeater
card
e.
Make sure that the other end of the SCSI cable is attached to the power
backplane located on the rear of the shuttle.
SCSI connector on
power backplane
78
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
6.
Slide the hot-swap hard disk drives back into place in the drive bays. If you need
to install additional hot-swap drives, do so now (see “Installing a hot-swap hard
disk drive” on page 81). You can connect a maximum of 10 hard disk drives to the
SCSI backplane.
Note: After you connect these hard disk drives to the SCSI backplane, the
backplane sets the SCSI IDs for the backplane and the hard disk drives.
See “Setting SCSI IDs” on page 97 for additional information.
7.
Reinstall fan assembly 1 in the server.
8.
Reconnect the shuttle.
Retaining lever
(unlocked position)
Retaining lever
(locked position)
Pin
Pin
9.
a.
Align the two shuttle pins with the holes on each side of the rear of the
chassis, and disengage the retaining levers from the notches on the chassis.
b.
Move the retaining levers toward the front of the server, and secure the
retaining levers in the horizontal (locked) position.
If you disconnected the SCSI cable from the ServeRAID adapter in step 2 on page
73, reconnect the SCSI cable to the adapter.
10. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 91.
Installing internal drives
If you add different types of drives, the system can read multiple types of media and
store more data. Several types of drives are available, such as:
•
•
•
•
Diskette
Hard disk
CD-ROM
Tape
Internal drives are installed in bays. Your server comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB
diskette drive and one IDE CD-ROM drive.
Installing options
79
3.5-inch diskette drive
CD-ROM drive
Media bays 1 and 2
Hot-swap hard
disk drive bay
Your server contains hardware that enables you to replace a failed hard disk drive
without turning off the server. Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing to
operate the system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed. These drives are
known as hot-swap drives.
Each hot-swap drive has two indicator lights on the front of the server. If the amber
hard-disk status light for a drive is lit continuously, that individual drive is faulty and
needs to be replaced. When the hard-disk status light indicates a drive fault, you can
replace a hot-swap drive without turning off the server.
Each hot-swap drive that you plan to install must be mounted in a hot-swap-drive
tray. The drive must have a single connector attachment (SCA) connector. Hot-swapdrive trays come with hot-swap drives.
Internal drive bays
Internal drives are installed in bays.
•
Your server comes with one CD-ROM drive and one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB diskette
drive.
•
The left front bays support 5.25-inch, half-high, removable-media drives. Any
two adjacent 5.25-inch, half-high bays can be converted to a single full-high bay.
Note: The server EMI integrity and cooling are both protected by having the left
front bays covered or occupied. When you install a drive, save the filler
panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive and do not replace it
with another.
80
•
You cannot install hard disk drives in the left front bays. You can install hot-swap
hard disk drives only in the hot-swap hard disk drive bays on the right front side
of the server.
•
If you are installing a device with a 50-pin connector in one of the left front bays,
you will need a 68-to-50-pin converter (option number 32G3925).
•
Your server supports ten 1-inch (26 mm) slim-high, 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk
drives in the hot-swap bays.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
•
The hot-swap bays connect to the LVD SCSI backplane. Your server comes with
two SCSI channels on this backplane. For more information, see “LVD SCSI
backplane” on page 72.
Some drives have a special interface called small computer system interface, or SCSI.
Using this interface, you can attach multiple drives to a single SCSI controller.
Notes:
1.
Any information about SCSI drives also applies to other SCSI devices, such as
scanners and printers.
2.
If you plan to install both internal and external SCSI devices, you must follow the
instructions in “Connecting external options” on page 93, in addition to the
instructions in this section.
A 16-bit (wide) low voltage differential (LVD) SCSI cable connects the hard disk drive
backplane to the ServeRaid adapter located in a PCI slot on the processor board. An
additional 16-bit, two-drop SCSI cable comes with the server. It is located in the
bottom of the server media bay and is restrained with a cable clamp.
If you want to install SCSI devices in the removable media bays:
1.
Locate the internal SCSI connector on the power backplane.
2.
Use the 16-bit two-drop SCSI cable located in the bottom of the server media bay.
3.
Connect the SCSI device(s) in the removable media bay to the internal SCSI
connector on the power backplane.
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive
Refer to the following illustration when installing a hot-swap drive.
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
•
Read the documentation that comes with the option.
Gap filler
Gap filler
Slim
filler panel
Drive tray handle
(in open position)
Note: You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in these bays.
Installing options
81
To install a drive in a hot-swap bay:
1.
Remove the filler panel from one of the empty hot-swap bays by inserting your
finger into the depression at the left side of the filler panel and pulling it away
from the server.
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for
more than 10 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed
for each bay.
2.
Install the hard disk drive in the hot-swap bay:
a.
If there is a small gap above or below the drive, separate the slim filler from
the filler panel, and insert it in the gap.
Note: A drive placement guide is located on the inside edge of the bezel. The
drive placement guide indicates the placement for slim-high drives.
The guide also shows the SCSI ID assigned to the drive.
b.
Ensure the tray handle is open (that is, perpendicular to the drive).
c.
Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.
d. Gently push the drive assembly into the bay until the drive stops.
e.
Push the tray handle to the closed (locked) position.
f.
Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify that the hard disk drive
is operating properly.
If the amber hard-disk status light for a drive is lit continuously, that
individual drive is faulty and needs to be replaced. If the green hard-disk
activity light is flashing, the drive is being accessed.
Note: If the server has an optional RAID controller installed, you must configure
the disk arrays after installing hard disk drives. Refer to “Using IBM
ServeRAID” on page 117 for information.
Installing a 5.25-inch removable-media drive
Refer to the following illustrations when installing a 5.25-inch removable media drive.
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
•
Read the documentation that comes with the option.
Slide rails for
use with a tape drive
Filler panel with
EMI sheild
Slide rails
Drive
82
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Choose the bay in which you want to install the drive. Also, check the instructions
that come with the drive to see if you need to set any switches or jumpers on the
drive.
To install a removable-media drive in one of the left front bays:
1.
Turn off the server and all attached devices. Disconnect all external cables and
remove the top cover.
2.
Remove the media-bay bezel.
3.
Remove the filler panel from the bay opening. Keep the filler panel nearby.
Note: The server EMI integrity and cooling are both protected by having the left
front bays covered or occupied. When you install a drive, save the filler
panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive and do not replace it
with another.
4.
Touch the static-protective bag containing the drive to any unpainted metal
surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the bag and place it on a staticprotective surface.
5.
Remove the snap-on slide rails from the filler panel and snap the rails on the
drive. Store the filler panel for later use.
Note: Slide rails for installing a tape drive are attached with screws. Use the
screws to attach the rails to the side of the tape drive.
6.
Align the slide rails on the drive with the guide rails in the bay; then, slide the
drive into the bay until it snaps into place.
Note: If you are installing a tape drive, use the screws that are shipped next to
the tape drive rails to attach the tape drive to the front of the chassis.
7.
Disconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108).
8.
If you are installing a SCSI device, go to step 9.. If you are installing an IDE
device, go to step 10..
9.
Install the two-drop SCSI cable:
a.
Locate the two-drop SCSI cable. The two-drop SCSI cable is located in the
bottom of the server between the open bays and the power supply area. It is
folded and restrained with a cable clamp.
b.
Connect one of the connectors on the two-drop SCSI cable to the back of the
drive. Go to step 11..
c.
Connect the other end of the two-drop SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on
the power backplane.
d. Go to step 11..
10. To install an IDE device, such as a CD-ROM or a DVD-ROM, use the two-drop
IDE cable that comes with the option.
a.
Remove the cable that connects the CD-ROM to the IDE connector on the
power backplane.
b.
Using the two-drop cable that came with the IDE option, connect the CDROM and IDE device you are installing to the IDE connector on the power
backplane.
c.
Set the jumper on the back of the new IDE option as secondary.
11. Connect a power cable to the back of the drive. Power cables for removablemedia drives come installed in the server. The connectors are keyed and can be
inserted only one way.
12. If you are installing another 5.25-inch drive, do so now. Otherwise, continue with
step 13 on page 84.
Installing options
83
13. Connect the shuttle.
a.
Slide the shuttle back into the server
b.
Disengage the retaining levers from the notches on the chassis.
c.
Move the retaining levers toward the front of the server.
d. Secure the retaining levers in the horizontal position.
14. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 91.
Installing memory-module kits
Before you continue with the memory-installation procedure, review the following:
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
•
All the DIMMs installed in each set must be the same size and speed, but all the
sets do not have to contain DIMMs of the same size and speed.
•
The memory board contains 16 DIMM connectors and supports 4-way memory
interleaving.
•
Install only 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, registered DIMMs. Only 100 MHz, 72-bit,
registered, synchronous, error correcting code (ECC), SDRAM configuration
DIMM memory is supported for the 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB and 1 GB (when
available) DIMMs.
•
If you install 4 GB of memory, some of the memory is reserved for system
resources. The amount reserved for system resources depends on the
configuration of the server.
•
If you install 16 GB of memory, the Configuration/Setup Utility will display the
memory that is usable by the network operating system. This amount of memory
might differ from the amount of memory you have installed.
•
Installing or removing DIMMs changes the configuration information in the
server. Therefore, after installing or removing a DIMM, you must save the new
configuration information in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. Refer to
“Using the Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 45 for more
information.
•
Install the DIMMs in the order provided in Table 7.
•
For the locations of the DIMM connectors, see “Memory board component
locations” on page 57.
Set of 4 DIMMs
First set (shipped as standard)
2nd set
3rd set
4th set
Install DIMMs in these connectors:
J1, J5, J9, J13
J2, J6, J10, J14
J3, J7, J11, J15
J4, J8, J12, J16
Table 7. DIMM installation order.
Refer to the following illustration when installing memory.
84
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Pop rivets
Processor housing
cover
DIMM
Memory board
To install a memory module:
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Read the documentation that comes with your option.
1.
Review “Before you begin” on page 58.
2.
Turn off the server and all attached devices. Disconnect external cables and
power cords and remove the top cover.
3.
Pull up the two pop rivets on the processor housing cover and remove the cover
from the processor housing.
4.
Remove the memory board assembly:
a.
Lift up on the memory board assembly and remove it from the server.
b.
Place the memory board assembly on a static-protective surface, such as the
static-protective package in which the option came.
5.
Locate the DIMM connectors on the memory board. Determine the DIMM
connectors into which you will install the DIMMs. (See the notes at the beginning
of this procedure.)
6.
Touch the static-protective package containing the DIMM option to any
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the package.
Note: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM connectors,
handle the clips gently.
Installing options
85
7.
8.
9.
To install the DIMMs, repeat the following steps for each DIMM that you install.
a.
Turn the DIMM so that the pins align correctly with the DIMM connector.
b.
Insert the DIMM by pressing the DIMM straight into the connector. Be sure
that the retaining clips snap into the closed position.
Install the memory board assembly:
a.
Hold the memory board assembly and align it over the memory board
connector.
b.
Insert the memory board assembly into the connector.
Install the processor housing cover and push the two pop rivets down to secure
the cover.
10. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 91.
Installing a microprocessor kit
The server comes with one microprocessor installed on the processor board. If you
install an additional microprocessor kit, the server can operate as a symmetric
multiprocessing (SMP) server. With SMP, certain operating systems and application
programs can distribute the processing load among the microprocessors.
Microprocess
or speed
(MHz)
Core/bus
fraction
700
7.0
900
Automatic
setting
J13 Jumper
J14 Jumper
J15 Jumper
J16 Jumper
Pins 2 and 3
Pins 1 and 2
Pins 1 and 2
Pins 2 and 3
Due to the automatic speed setting, no jumper settings are
required.
Table 8. Microprocessor core frequency selection.
Notes:
1.
Thoroughly review the documentation that comes with the microprocessor, so
that you can determine whether you need to update the server basic
input/output system (BIOS) code. The latest level of BIOS code for the server is
available through the World Wide Web. Go to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support/, select IBM Servers, and make the selections
for your server.
2.
Obtain an SMP-capable operating system (optional). For a list of supported
operating systems, see http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat/ on the World
Wide Web.
Attention: To avoid damage and ensure proper server operation when you
install a new or an additional microprocessor, use microprocessors that have the
same cache size and type, and the same clock speed. Microprocessor internal and
external clock frequencies must be identical.
86
3.
To order additional microprocessor options, contact your IBM reseller or IBM
marketing representative.
4.
If you replace the microprocessor in the server with a microprocessor that
operates at a different speed, be sure to set the microprocessor core-frequencyselection jumpers correctly. See Table 8.
5.
Your server comes standard with one microprocessor installed. The
microprocessor is installed in microprocessor connector J2 and is the startup
(boot) processor. A microprocessor installed in microprocessor connector J3 is
processor 2; a microprocessor installed in microprocessor connector J4 is
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
processor 3; a microprocessor installed in microprocessor connector J5 is
processor 4. If more than one microprocessor is installed, the highest numbered
processor is the one the server will start from. The lower numbered
microprocessors are used as application processors.
The following table and the label on the inside of the top cover of the server show the
order in which additional microprocessors and voltage regulator modules (VRMs)
must be installed.
Table 9. Microprocessor and VRM installation order.
Note: "T" indicates an installed terminator card; "X" indicates an installed microprocessor or VRM. A terminator card
must be installed in each microprocessor connector that does not contain a microprocessor.
One microprocessor installed
Microprocessor connectors
VRM connectors
J2 (P1)
J3 (P2)
J4 (P3)
J5 (P4)
J37 (VRM 1) J38 (VRM 2) J39 (VRM 3) J41 (VRM 4)
X
T
T
T
X
Two microprocessors installed
Microprocessor connectors
VRM connectors
J2 (P1)
J3 (P2)
J4 (P3)
J5 (P4)
J37 (VRM 1) J38 (VRM 2) J39 (VRM 3) J41 (VRM 4)
X
X
T
T
X
X
Three microprocessors installed
Microprocessor connectors
VRM connectors
J2 (P1)
J3 (P2)
J4 (P3)
J5 (P4)
J37 (VRM 1) J38 (VRM 2) J39 (VRM 3) J41 (VRM 4)
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
Four microprocessors installed
Microprocessor connectors
VRM connectors
J2 (P1)
J3 (P2)
J4 (P3)
J5 (P4)
J37 (VRM 1) J38 (VRM 2) J39 (VRM 3) J41 (VRM 4)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
To install an additional microprocessor kit:
1.
Review “Before you begin” on page 58.
2.
Turn off the server and all attached devices. Disconnect all external cables and
power cords and remove the top cover.
Pop rivets
Processor housing
cover
VRM
Terminator card
Installing options
87
3.
Pull up the two pop rivets on the processor housing cover and remove the cover
from the processor housing.
4.
Determine the slots where you will install the microprocessor and VRM.
5.
Remove the terminator card from the microprocessor connector.
6.
Install the microprocessor:
a.
Touch the static-protective package containing the new microprocessor to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the microprocessor from
the package.
b.
Hold the microprocessor by the open latches, and center the microprocessor
over the microprocessor connector.
Attention: Make sure the microprocessor is oriented and aligned correctly
before you try to close the latches.
7.
c.
Carefully close the latches to seat the microprocessor in the connector.
d.
Store the terminator card in a safe place in the static-protective package that
the new microprocessor comes in; you will need to install it again if you ever
remove the microprocessor.
Install the voltage regulator module (VRM):
a.
Center the VRM over the connector. Make sure that the VRM is oriented and
aligned correctly.
Note: If you remove the microprocessor later, remember to install the
terminator card in the appropriate microprocessor connector and to
remove the VRM for that microprocessor.
b.
Carefully close the latches to seat the VRM in the connector.
8.
Install the processor housing cover and push down on the two pop rivets.
9.
If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 91.
Installing a hot-swap power supply
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label
attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component
that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these
88
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service
technician.
Before you continue with the power supply-installation procedure, review the
following.
Notes:
1.
During normal operation, each power supply bay must have either a power
supply or filler panel installed for proper cooling.
2.
Before you install a power supply in the right-most power supply bay, you must
disconnect the cable-management arm. You can connect the cable-management
arm after installing the power supply.
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
•
Read the documentation that comes with the option.
Refer to the following illustration to install a hot-swap power supply.
Handle
Filler panel
DC power light
AC power light
To install an additional power supply:
1.
Remove the filler panel.
2.
Place the handle on the power supply in the open position.
3.
Slide the power supply into the chassis and close the handle.
4.
Plug one end of the power cord into the power supply; then, plug the other end of
the cord into a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5.
Verify that the DC Power light and the AC Power light on the power supply are
lit, indicating that the power supply is operating properly.
Installing options
89
CAUTION:
If you install a strain-relief bracket option over the end of the power cord that is
connected to the device, you must connect the other end of the power cord to an
easily accessible power source.
Replacing a hot-swap fan
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
•
Read the documentation that comes with the option.
Refer to the following illustration to replace a hot-swap fan.
1
2
6
5
4
3
∼1∼
Latch
∼2∼
Hot-swap fan assembly 2
∼3∼
Hot-swap fan assembly 4
∼4∼
Pop rivet
∼5∼
Hot-swap fan assembly 3
∼6∼
Hot-swap fan assembly 1
To replace a hot-swap fan assembly:
1.
If you are replacing fan assembly 1, 2, or 3:
a.
Remove the top cover.
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, keep the cover removed for no
more than 30 minutes during this procedure.
b.
90
Press the fan release latch and lift the fan assembly out of the server.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
c.
Slide the replacement fan assembly into the server. The latch will snap into
place and secure the fan in the server.
d. Replace the top cover
2.
If you are replacing fan assembly 4:
a.
Pull out on the orange pop rivet on the rear fan bracket; then, lift the fan
assembly up and out of the hinge cutouts.
b.
Slide the replacement fan assembly into the server. (Make sure the fan
assembly fits correctly into the hinge cutouts on the rear of the shuttle.)
c.
When you have the fan assembly properly seated, push on the pop rivet until
it clicks into place.
Completing the installation
To complete the installation, you must reinstall the front trim bezel, reinstall the
media bay bezel, reinstall the top cover, reconnect all the cables that you disconnected,
and for certain options, run the Configuration/Setup Utility program. Follow the
instructions in this section.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, install the top cover before turning on the
server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (over 30
minutes) with the top cover removed might damage server components.
Installing the front trim bezel
∼1∼
Side tabs
∼2∼
Bottom tabs
1.
Align the two bottom tabs with the notches on the bottom front of the server.
2.
Align the side tabs with the notches on the sides of the server.
3.
Gently press the bezel into place.
Installing the media-bay bezel
Refer to the following illustration to install the media-bay bezel.
Installing options
91
1
∼1∼
Media-bay bezel
To install the media-bay bezel:
1.
Insert the two tabs on the top of the media-bay bezel into the matching holes on
the server chassis.
2.
Push the bottom of the media-bay bezel toward the server until the two tabs at the
bottom of the bezel snap into place.
Installing the top cover
1
2
∼1∼
Top cover
∼2∼
Captive screws
To install the server top cover:
1.
Before installing the cover, check that all cables, adapters, and other components
are installed and seated correctly and that you have not left loose tools or parts
inside the server.
2.
Lower the cover with the rear edge of the cover about 25 mm (1 inch) back from
the rear edge of the server.
3.
Slide the cover forward.
4.
Tighten the two captive screws on the back edge of the cover.
5.
If you disconnected any cables from the back of the server, reconnect the cables;
then, plug the power cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.
Note: If necessary, see “Cabling the server” on page 104 for connector locations.
92
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Reconfiguring the server
When you start the server for the first time after you add or remove an internal option
or an external SCSI device, you might see a message telling you that the configuration
has changed. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to save the new
configuration information. See “Configuring the server” on page 45.
Some options have device drivers that you need to install. Refer to the documentation
that comes with the option for information about installing any required device
drivers.
If you have installed a new microprocessor, you might want to upgrade the operating
system to support symmetric multiprocessing (SMP).
Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to save the new configuration
information. See “Configuring the server” on page 45.
If you have installed or removed a hard disk drive, refer to “Using IBM ServeRAID”
on page 117 for information about reconfiguring the disk arrays.
Connecting external options
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58. Also, read the
documentation that comes with the options.
To attach an external device:
1.
Turn off the server and all attached devices.
2.
Follow the instructions that come with the option to prepare it for installation and
to connect it to the server.
Input/output ports
This section provides information about the input/output (I/O) ports on the rear of
the server. These ports include the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
One parallel port
One video port
One keyboard port
One auxiliary-device port (mouse)
One dual-channel Ultra-2 (LVD) SCSI port
Two serial ports
Two Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports
One Ethernet port
Three communication ports dedicated to the Advanced System Management
processor
Refer to the following illustration for the location of input and output connectors.
Installing options
93
Advanced Systems
Management Interconnect knockout
Parallel
Serial A
System management
Ethernet
Serial B
ASM Interconnect
port A
USB1
USB2
ASM Interconnect
port B
Video
Ultra2 SCSI
Keyboard
Mouse
Parallel port
The server has one parallel port. This port supports three standard Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1284 modes of operation: Standard Parallel
Port (SPP), Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP), and Extended Capability Port (ECP).
Viewing or changing the parallel-port
assignments
You can use the built-in Configuration/Setup Utility program to configure the
parallel port as bidirectional; that is, so that data can be both read from and written to
a device. In bidirectional mode, the server supports the ECP and EPP modes.
To view or change the parallel-port assignment:
1.
Restart the server and watch the monitor screen.
2.
When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
Note: The Devices and I/O Ports choice appears only on the full configuration
menu. If you set two levels of passwords, you must enter the
administrator password to access the full configuration menu.
3.
From the main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports; then, press Enter.
4.
Select the parallel port; then, use the arrow keys to advance through the settings
available.
Note: When you configure the parallel port as bidirectional, use an IEEE 1284compliant cable. The maximum length of the cable must not exceed 3
meters (9.8 feet).
5.
94
Select Save Settings; then, select Exit Setup to exit from the Configuration/Setup
Utility main menu.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Parallel port connector
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the 25-pin, female D-shell
parallel-port connector on the rear of the server.
1
13
25
14
Table 10. Parallel-port connector pin-number assignments.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
I/O
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SPP/ECP Signal
-STROBE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
-ACK
BUSY
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
-AUTO FD (feed)
-ERROR
-INIT
-SLCT IN
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
EPP Signal
-WRITE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
-ACK
-WAIT
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
-AUTO FD
-ERROR
-INIT
-SLCT IN
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Video port
Your server comes with an integrated super video graphics array (SVGA) video
controller. This controller is not removable, but you can disable it by installing a PCI
video adapter.
Note: If you install a PCI video adapter, the server BIOS will automatically disable
the integrated video controller.
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the 15-pin analog video
connector on the rear of the server.
Installing options
95
5
1
15
11
Table 11. Video-port connector pin-number assignments.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal
Red
Green or monochrome
Blue
Monitor ID bit 2
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
+5 V dc
Ground
Monitor ID bit 0
DDC SDA
Horizontal synchronization (Hsynch)
Vertical synchronization (Vsynch)
DDC SCL
Keyboard port
There is one keyboard port connector on the rear of the server.
Note: If you attach a standard (non-USB) keyboard to the keyboard connector, the
USB ports and devices will be disabled during the power-on self-test (POST).
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the keyboard connector
on the rear of the server.
6
5
4
3
2
1
Table 12. Keyboard connector pin-number assignments .
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
96
I/O
I/O
N/A
N/A
N/A
I/O
N/A
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Signal
Data
Reserved
Ground
+5 V dc
Keyboard clock
Reserved
Auxiliary-device (pointing device) port
The I/O board has one auxiliary-device port that supports a mouse or other pointing
device.
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the auxiliary-device
connector on the rear of the server.
6
5
4
3
2
1
Table 13. Auxiliary-device connector pin-number assignments .
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Signal
Data
Not connected
Ground
+5 V dc
Clock
Not connected
Ultra2 (LVD) SCSI ports
The server supports an optional IBM ServeRAID controller. This controller provides
three independent SCSI channels. A 16-bit (wide) LVD SCSI cable connects the hard
disk drive backplane to one channel of the RAID controller. Two 68-pin SCSI
connectors for two additional channels are on the rear of the server. Refer to “Using
IBM ServeRAID” on page 117.
The server has a dual-channel Ultra-2 small computer system interface (SCSI)
controller. This controller supports two independent SCSI channels: one external and
one internal. Each of these channels supports up to 15 SCSI devices. You can use the
external LVD SCSI channel connector, on the rear of the server, to connect different
types of SCSI devices, such as drives or printers.
SCSI cabling requirements
If you plan to attach external SCSI devices, you must order additional SCSI cables. To
select and order the correct cables for use with external devices, contact your IBM
reseller or IBM marketing representative.
For information about the maximum length of SCSI cable between the terminated
ends of the cable, refer to the ANSI SCSI standards. Adhering to these standards will
help ensure that the server operates properly.
Setting SCSI IDs
Each SCSI device connected to a SCSI controller must have a unique SCSI ID. This ID
enables the SCSI controller to identify the device and ensure that different devices on
the same SCSI channel do not attempt to transfer data simultaneously. SCSI devices
that are connected to different SCSI channels can have duplicate SCSI IDs. SCSI IDs 6
and 7 are reserved for the SCSI controller on either SCSI channel A or B. The following
table lists the SCSI IDs for devices that are connected to one channel. In Table 14 on
page 98, the hot-swap hard disk drive bays are in the standard (vertical)
configuration.
Installing options
97
Standard (SCSI channel A)
Optional (SCSI channel B)
Drive bay 1: SCSI ID 0
Drive bay 1: SCSI ID 11
Drive bay 2: SCSI ID 1
Drive bay 2: SCSI ID 12
Drive bay 3: SCSI ID 2
Drive bay 3: SCSI ID 13
Drive bay 4: SCSI ID 3
Drive bay 4: SCSI ID 14
Drive bay 5: SCSI ID 4
Drive bay 5: SCSI ID 15
Backplane: SCSI ID 8
Backplane: SCSI ID 9
Table 14. SCSI IDs for hot-swap hard disk drives and
backplanes (standard configuration).
The hot-swap-drive backplane controls the SCSI IDs for the internal hot-swap drive
bays. However, when you attach SCSI devices to the external SCSI connector, you
must set a unique ID for the device. Refer to the information that is provided with the
device for instructions to set its SCSI ID.
SCSI connector pin-number assignments
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the 68-pin SCSI
connectors.
34
1
68
35
Table 15. 68-pin SCSI connector pin-number assignments.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
98
Signal
+Data 12
+Data 13
+Data 14
+Data 15
+Data P1
+Data 0
+Data1
+Data 2
+Data 3
+Data 4
+Data 5
+Data 6
+Data 7
+Data P
Ground
DIFFSENS
Term power
Term power
Reserved
Ground
+Attention
Ground
+Busy
+Acknowledge
+Reset
+Message
+Select
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Pin
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
Signal
-Data 12
-Data 13
-Data 14
-Data 15
-Data P1
-Data 0
-Data 1
-Data 2
-Data 3
-Data 4
-Data 5
-Data 6
-Data 7
-Data P
Ground
Ground
Term power
Term power
Reserved
Ground
-Attention
Ground
-Busy
-Acknowledge
-Reset
-Message
-Select
Table 15. 68-pin SCSI connector pin-number assignments.
Pin
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Signal
+Control/Data
+Request
+Input/Output
+Data 8
+Data 9
+Data 10
+Data 11
Pin
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
Signal
-Control/Data
-Request
-Input/Output
-Data 8
-Data9
-Data 10
-Data 11
Serial ports
The server has two standard serial ports: Serial port A and Serial port B. The
operating system can use and share both serial ports; however, the integrated
Advanced System Management Processor can use and share only Serial port A.
Some application programs require specific ports, and some modems function
properly only at certain communication port addresses. You might need to use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to change communication port address
assignments to prevent or resolve address conflicts.
Viewing or changing the serial-port assignments
To view or change the serial-port assignments:
1.
Restart the server and watch the monitor screen.
2.
When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
3.
From the main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports; then, press Enter.
Note: The Devices and I/O Ports choice appears only on the full configuration
menu. If you set two levels of passwords, you must enter the
administrator password to access the full configuration menu.
4.
Select the serial port; then, use the arrow keys to advance through the settings
available.
5.
Select Save Settings; then, select Exit Setup to exit from the Configuration/Setup
Utility main menu.
Serial-port connectors
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the 9-pin, male D-shell
serial-port connectors on the rear of the server. These pin-number assignments
conform to the industry standard.
5
1
6
9
Table 16. Serial-port connectors pin-number assignments.
Pin
1
2
3
4
Signal
Data carrier detect
Receive data
Transmit data
Data terminal ready
Pin
6
7
8
9
Signal
Data set ready
Request to send
Clear to send
Ring indicator
Installing options
99
Table 16. Serial-port connectors pin-number assignments.
Pin
5
Signal
Pin
Signal
Signal ground
Universal Serial Bus ports
The server has two Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports that configure automatically.
USB is an emerging serial interface standard for telephony and multimedia devices. It
uses Plug and Play technology to determine the type of device attached to the
connector.
Notes:
1.
If you attach a standard (non-USB) keyboard to the keyboard connector, the USB
ports and devices will be disabled during the power-on self-test (POST).
2.
If you install a USB keyboard that has a mouse port, the USB keyboard emulates a
mouse and you will not be able to disable the mouse settings in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
3.
Check to make sure your NOS supports USB devices.
USB cables and hubs
You need a 4-pin cable to connect devices to USB 1 or USB 2. If you plan to attach
more than two USB devices to the machine, you must use a hub to connect the
devices. The hub provides multiple connectors for attaching additional external USB
devices with a maximum of 127 external devices.
USB technology provides up to 12 megabits-per-second (Mbps) speed with a
maximum of 127 external devices and a maximum signal distance of five meters (16
ft.) per segment.
USB-port connectors
Each USB port has an external connector on the rear of the server for attaching USB
compatible devices.
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the USB-port connectors
on the rear of the server.
Table 17. USB-port connector pin-number assignments.
Pin
1
2
3
4
Signal
VCC
-Data
+Data
Ground
Ethernet port
Your server comes with an integrated Ethernet controller. This controller provides an
interface for connecting to 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps networks and provides full-duplex
(FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and reception of data on
the Ethernet local area network (LAN).
To access the Ethernet port, connect a Category 3, 4 or 5 unshielded twisted-pair
(UTP) cable to the RJ-45 connector on the rear of the server.
100
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Note: The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that the cabling in the
network be Category 5 or higher.
Configuring the Ethernet controller
When you connect the server to the network, the Ethernet controller automatically
detects the data-transfer rate (10Mbps or 100Mbps) on the network and then sets the
controller to operate at the appropriate rate. That is, the Ethernet controller will
adjust to the network data rate, whether the data rate is standard Ethernet (10BASET), Fast Ethernet (100BASE-TX), half duplex (HDX), or full duplex (FDX). The
controller supports half-duplex (HDX) and full-duplex (FDX) modes at both speeds.
The Ethernet controller is a PCI Plug and Play device. You do not need to set any
jumpers or configure the controller for the operating system before you use the
Ethernet controller. However, you must install a device driver to enable the operating
system to address the Ethernet controller. The device drivers are provided on the
ServerGuide CDs.
Failover for redundant Ethernet
The IBM 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter is an optional redundant network interface
card (NIC adapter) that you can install in the server. If you install this NIC adapter
and connect it to the same logical LAN segment as the primary Ethernet controller,
you can configure the server to support a failover function. You can configure either
the integrated Ethernet controller or the NIC adapter as the primary Ethernet
controller. In failover mode, if the primary Ethernet controller detects a link failure,
all Ethernet traffic associated with it is switched to the redundant (secondary)
controller. This switching occurs without any user intervention. When the primary
link is restored to an operational state, the Ethernet traffic switches back to the
primary Ethernet controller. The switch back to the primary Ethernet controller can be
automatic or manually controlled, depending on the setup and operating system.
Note that only one controller in the redundant pair is active at any given time. For
example, if the primary Ethernet controller is active, then the secondary Ethernet
controller cannot be used for any other network operation.
Note: The operating system determines the maximum number of IBM 10/100 Fault
Tolerant Adapters that you can install in the server. See the documentation
that comes with the adapter for more information.
Considerations when combining failover and hot-plug
functions: If the operating system supports hot-plug PCI adapters and the optional
redundant NIC adapter is installed in a hot-plug PCI slot, you can replace the NIC
adapter without powering off the server — even if it is the primary Ethernet
controller. Disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the primary Ethernet controller will
cause the Ethernet traffic to switch automatically to the secondary Ethernet controller.
This can be very useful if a faulty adapter causes a network problem, or if you want to
upgrade the primary adapter hardware.
Note: If you hot replace the primary adapter while the Ethernet traffic is being
handled by the secondary Ethernet controller, the traffic does not
automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the primary adapter
comes back online. See “Configuring for failover”.
Configuring for failover: The failover feature currently is supported by OS/2™,
Windows NT Server, and IntraNetWare. The setup required for each operating
system follows.
Windows NT Server: IBM offers hot-plug support for Windows NT Server Version 4.0.
Failover can work in conjunction with hot-plug support or independently. If you are
not using hot-plug support, go to “Windows NT Server failover setup” on page 102.
Installing options
101
Windows NT Server hot-plug setup: IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0
package is available for download from the IBM Web site at:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support
Enter the brand type of Server, click on Downloadable files and look for Hot Plug.
The IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package uses the Intel Desktop
Management Interface (DMI) to control hot-plug support for the Ethernet controllers.
The Ethernet controller in the computer is DMI compliant. Download and install the
following software in the order listed:
1.
2.
3.
IBM PCI Hotplug for Windows NT 4.0 Failover DMI Agent
IBM PCI Hot Plug for Windows NT 4.0 Solution
IBM 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter device drivers
Note: The order of installation is important. You must install the IBM Hot Plug for
Windows NT Server 4.0 package before you install the IBM 10/100 Fault
Tolerant Adapter driver. If you install the adapter device driver before the PCI
Hot Plug Solution package, the adapter device driver will not recognize the
hot-plug code. This happens because the adapter device driver only checks
the NT registry for the Hot Plug package during installation. If the PCI Hot
Plug Solution package is added after the adapter device driver is installed, the
adapter must be removed and added again in order for it to detect the PCI
Hot-Plug Solution code.
To install the IBM PCI Hotplug for Windows NT 4.0 Failover DMI Agent:
1.
Download the IBM PCI Hotplug for Windows NT 4.0 Failover DMI Agent DMI
Agent file from the Support web page and extract the files onto a diskette.
2.
Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.
3.
From the Start menu, select the Run option.
4.
Type A:\SETUP.EXE in the Open box.
5.
Click Ok. The setup wizard opens.
6.
Follow the instructions that are given by the setup wizard until the program is
installed.
7.
Restart the server.
To install the IBM PCI Hot Plug for Windows NT 4.0 Solution package:
1.
Download the IBM PCI Hot Plug for Windows NT 4.0 Solution file from the
support web page and extract the files onto a diskette.
2.
Log on to Windows NT Server as a user in the Administrator group.
3.
Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.
4.
From the Start menu, select the Run option.
5.
Type A:\SETUP.EXE in the Open box.
6.
Click OK. The Setup wizard opens.
7.
Follow the instructions given by the setup wizard until the program is installed.
Windows NT Server failover setup: To install the IBM 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter
device drivers:
102
1.
Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions that are provided
with the adapter.
2.
Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet Ethernet Family adapter
device driver.
3.
Do not select the Grouping box at this point; you must first restart the machine.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
4.
From the Windows NT Server desktop, select Control Panel, then select the
Network icon, then select the Adapters tab.
5.
Highlight one of the adapters that will be in the redundant pair and then click the
Properties... button.
6.
Check the Grouping box. This will show the possible combinations for redundant
pairs.
7.
Select the adapter pair you want and then select OK. Note that the integrated
Ethernet controller is located at PCI C.
Two options are available for recovering from a failover condition. The options
are determined by the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox. If the IBM
Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package is installed, this checkbox will
appear at the bottom of the Adapter Properties panel. If you do not have the IBM
Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package installed on the server, you will
not see the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox.
If the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox is not checked or is not
present, traffic will automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the
primary link status is restored. In this mode, the adapter cannot be hot-swapped.
Users with the IBM Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package installed
should check the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox.
If the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox is checked, traffic will
remain on the secondary adapter until the user directs it to return to the primary
adapter. This can be done after the hot-swap replacement of the primary adapter
or by using the DMI interface.
8.
Select Close to exit from the Network setup.
When you restart the server, the failover function will be in effect.
If a failover occurs, a message is written to the NT Event Viewer log. In addition, if
the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox is checked, a DMI alert will also be
generated.
IntraNetWare: The IBM PCI Hot Plug System Bus Driver Diskette for Novell Netware
V4.41, V4.42, and V5.0 is available for download from the IBM Web site at:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support
The failover function is now enabled. If a failover occurs:
•
The operating system console generates a message.
•
The custom counters for the device driver contain variables that define the state of
the failover function and the location of the redundant pair. You can use the
NetWare Monitor to view the custom counters.
Note: If the primary adapter was hot-replaced while the Ethernet traffic was being
handled by the secondary Ethernet controller, the traffic does not
automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the primary adapter
comes back online. In this case, issue the command:
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW SCAN
where d and path are the drive and path where the driver is located. This
command causes the device driver to locate the primary adapter and switch
the Ethernet traffic to it.
Ethernet port connector
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the RJ-45 connector.
These assignments apply to both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX devices.
Installing options
103
Table 18. Ethernet RJ-45 connector pin-number assignments..
Pin
1
2
3
4
Signal
Transmit data+
Transmit dataReceive data+
Not connected
Pin
5
6
7
8
Signal
Not connected
Receive data Not connected
Not connected
Advanced System Management ports
Your server has three communication ports dedicated to the Advanced System
Management Processor. One port uses a standard D-shell serial-port connector,
connector C. The other two ports, which are used for the ASM Interconnect function,
use a dual RJ-45 connector.
You can attach a dedicated modem to the D-shell system-management connector on
the rear of the server to communicate with the integrated Advanced System
Management Processor.
The ASM Interconnect function uses the RJ-45 system-management connectors. This
function enables you to connect the Advanced System Management Processors of
several rack-mounted servers so that they can communicate with each other in halfduplex mode.
Cabling the server
Refer to the following illustration for the location of input and output connectors.
104
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Advanced Systems
Management Interconnect knockout
Parallel
Serial A
System management
Ethernet
Serial B
ASM Interconnect
port A
USB1
USB2
ASM Interconnect
port B
Video
Ultra2 SCSI
Keyboard
Mouse
Refer to the following illustration for an example of proper cable routing.
Installing the server in a rack
Refer to the Rack Installation Instructions for rack installation and removal instructions.
Installing options
105
106
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
FRU information (service only)
Field Replacement Units (FRUs) should be replaced by qualified service personnel
only.
Diagnostic switch card
Use the following illustration when replacing the diagnostic switch card.
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
PS4
PS3
PS2
NON
RED
OVER
SPEC
PS1
FAN
TEMP
VRM
PCIC
CPU
DASD
1
PCIB
MEM
SP
PCIA
NMI
SMI
∼1∼
Holding screw
∼2∼
Diagnostic switch card
1.
Power-off the server, if it is on.
2.
Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the
electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
4.
DIsconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108) and move it
back slightly.
5.
Disconnect the front LED card assembly cable from the diagnostic switch card.
6.
Disconnect the diagnostic switch card cable.
7.
Remove the screw from the diagnostic switch card.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
107
8.
Replace the card and reattach the front LED card cable and the diagnostic switch
card cable.
Disconnecting the shuttle
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
1.
Power-off the server, if it is on.
2.
Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the
electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
4.
Flip the top end of each diagonal side latch inward.
5.
Move each latch toward the rear of the shuttle until the latch is vertical.
6.
Fold the hinged top end of each latch outwards at the notch of the chassis.
7.
Slide the shuttle toward the rear of the server.
8.
To remove the shuttle, see “Removing the shuttle” on page 115.
Front LED card assembly
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
108
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
PS4
PS3
PS2
NON
RED
OVER
SPEC
PS1
FAN
TEMP
VRM
PCIC
CPU
DASD
1
PCIB
MEM
SP
PCIA
NMI
SMI
∼1∼
Retaining screws
∼2∼
Front LED card assembly
1.
Power-off the server, if it is on.
2.
Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the
electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
4.
Disconnect the cable to the diagnostic switch card.
5.
Remove the two retaining screws that secure the board in place.
6.
Remove and replace the board.
I/O Legacy board
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
Attention:
•
Existing system configuration will be lost. If possible, save the existing system
configuration or obtain a previously saved copy.
•
After replacing the I/O Legacy board, flash the system with the latest level BIOS.
Match the BIOS level currently installed on the system.
Use the following illustration as a guide to removing the I/O Legacy board.
FRU information (service only)
109
1.
Power-off the server off, if it is on.
2.
Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the
electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
4.
Disconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108.)
5.
Remove the shuttle (see “Removing the shuttle” on page 115).
6.
Remove the four shuttle screws (two on each side).
7.
Push in on the shuttle touchpoints.
8.
Separate the shuttle from the I/O Legacy board.
9.
To replace the I/O Legacy board, reverse this procedure.
Memory card removal
Before you begin:
110
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review “Before you begin” on page 58.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
To replace the memory card assembly:
1.
Power-off the server and all attached devices. Disconnect external cables and
power cords and remove the top cover.
2.
Pull up the two pop rivets on the processor housing cover and remove the cover
from the processor housing.
3.
Lift up on the memory card assembly and remove it from the server.
Note: When setting down the memory card assembly, be sure to place the
assembly only on a static-protective surface, such as a static-protective
package.
4.
Remove the memory modules (DIMMs) from the memory card assembly and seat
them in the new memory card assembly. See “Installing memory-module kits” on
page 84.
Note: Be sure to put the memory modules in the same positions on the
replacement assembly as they occupied on the assembly that has been
removed from the server.
5.
6.
Install the memory card assembly:
a.
Hold the memory card assembly and align it over the memory card
connector.
b.
Insert the memory card assembly into the connector.
Install the processor housing cover and push the two pop rivets down to secure
the cover.
FRU information (service only)
111
PCI switch card
Before you begin:
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review “Before you begin” on page 58.
∼1∼
Switch card latches
∼2∼
Switch card assembly
1.
Power-off the server, if it is on.
2.
Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the
electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
4.
Disconnect the switch card cable from the Processor/PCI board.
5.
Disengage the switch card:
6.
a.
Press the switch card latches toward the front and sides of the server.
b.
Push the latches through the notches.
When the switch card latches have been disengaged from the notches, gently pull
the switch card free and lift it up and out of the server.
Note: You may have to tilt the top of the switch card toward the front of the
server when removing it.
7.
To replace the switch card, reverse the steps above.
Power backplane assembly
Before you begin:
112
•
Read “Safety information” on page 180.
•
Review “Before you begin” on page 58.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
∼1∼
Retaining screws
∼2∼
Power backplane assembly
1.
Power-off the server, if it is on.
2.
Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the
electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
4.
Remove the shuttle (“Removing the shuttle” on page 115).
5.
Remove the hot-swap power supplies (reverse the steps in “Installing a hot-swap
power supply” on page 88).
6.
Turn the two retaining screws one-quarter turn.
7.
Lift the power backplane assembly.
8.
To replace the power backplane assembly, reverse this procedure.
Note: When replacing the power backplane assembly, you must align the bottom
of the assembly with the notches on the floor of the server.
Processor/PCI backplane
Review the information in “Before you begin” on page 58.
Note: Existing system configuration will be lost. If possible, save the existing system
configuration or obtain a previously saved copy.
FRU information (service only)
113
∼1∼
Cutouts
∼2∼
Processor/PCI Backplane assembly
∼3∼
Microprocessors
1.
Power-off the server, if it is on.
2.
Disconnect the power cord for each power source from the electrical outlet.
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power source from the
electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
4.
Disconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108.)
5.
Remove the shuttle (see “Removing the shuttle” on page 115).
6.
Disconnect the power cable.
7.
Disconnect the front fan cable.
8.
Disconnect the rear fan cable.
9.
Remove any hot-plug adapters (reverse the steps in “Installing a hot-plug adapter
(slots 3 through 6)” on page 62.)
10. Remove microprocessors, voltage regulator modules and terminator cards
(reverse the steps in “Installing a microprocessor kit” on page 86.)
11. Remove memory card.
12. Press the assembly inward at the cutouts to release the notches.
13. Lift the assembly out of the shuttle.
Note: Lift the assembly at an angle for easier removal.
14. To install the new Processor/PCI board, reverse the above procedure.
114
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Removing the shuttle
1.
Power-off the server, if it is on.
2.
Disconnect the power cord for each power supply from the electrical outlet.
Attention: The presence of ac standby power might result in damage to the
hardware unless you disconnect the power cord for each power supply from the
electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the top cover (see “Removing the top cover” on page 59).
4.
Disconnect the shuttle (see “Disconnecting the shuttle” on page 108.)
5.
Place one hand on the handle at the front portion of the shuttle, and place the
other hand on the ledge at the rear of the shuttle.
6.
Lift the shuttle at an angle with the rear of the shuttle being removed first and
remove the shuttle from the server.
FRU information (service only)
115
116
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Using IBM ServeRAID
Note: For a list of ServeRAID error codes, see “ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error codes”
on page 161.
The following information is for configuring an IBM ServeRAID-3H, ServeRAID3HB, or ServeRAID-3L. These high-performance, redundant array of independent
disk (RAID) controllers are ideally suited for data-storage environments that require
superior performance, flexibility, and reliable data storage.
You also can use the configuration and reference information in this chapter to
configure the IBM ServeRAID controllers provided on some IBM server system
boards.
Understanding RAID technology
RAID is the technology of grouping several physical drives in a computer into an
array that you can define as one or more logical drives. Each logical drive appears to
the operating system as a single drive. This grouping technique greatly enhances
logical-drive capacity and performance beyond the physical limitations of a single
physical drive.
When you group multiple physical drives into a logical drive, the ServeRAID
controller can transfer data in parallel from the multiple drives in the array. This
parallel transfer yields data-transfer rates that are many times higher than with
nonarrayed drives. This increased speed makes the system better able to meet the
throughput (the amount of work in a given amount of time) or productivity needs of
the multiple-user network environment.
The ability to respond to multiple data requests provides not only an impressive
increase in throughput, but also a decrease in response time. The combination of
parallel transfers and simultaneous responses to multiple requests allows disk arrays
to provide a high level of performance in network environments.
Stripe-unit size
With RAID technology, data is striped across an array of physical drives. This datadistribution scheme complements the way the operating system requests data.
The granularity at which data is stored on one drive of the array before subsequent
data is stored on the next drive of the array is called the stripe-unit size.
You can control the stripe-unit size and maximize the performance of the ServeRAID
controller by setting a stripe-unit size to a value that is close to the size of the system
I/O requests. You can set the stripe-unit size to 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, or 64 KB. For
example, performance in transaction-based environments, which typically involve
large blocks of data, might be optimal when the stripe-unit size is set to 32 KB or 64
KB; however, performance in file and print environments, which typically involve
multiple small blocks of data, might be optimal when the stripe-unit size is set to 8 KB
or 16 KB.
The collection, in logical order of these stripe units, from the first drive of the array to
the last drive of the array, is called a stripe.
Note: If you are using the ServeRAID-3L:
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
117
•
•
Eight physical drives are supported in an array if the stripe-unit size is set
to 32 KB or 64 KB.
Sixteen physical drives are supported in an array if the stripe-unit size is
set to 8 KB or 16 KB.
If you are using the ServeRAID-3H or ServeRAID-3HB, sixteen physical drives
are supported in an array if the stripe-unit size is set to 32 KB or 64 KB.
Supported RAID levels
Disk arrays are used to improve performance and reliability. The amount of
improvement depends on the application programs that you run on the server, the
RAID levels that you assign to the logical drives, and the stripe-unit size.
The ServeRAID controllers support RAID level-0, RAID level-1, RAID level-1
Enhanced (1E), RAID level-5 and RAID level-5 Enhanced (5E).
Understanding RAID level-0
RAID level-0 stripes the data across all the drives in the array. This offers substantial
speed enhancement, but provides for no data redundancy. RAID level-0 provides the
largest capacity of the RAID levels offered, because no room is taken up for redundant
data or data-parity storage.
RAID level-0 requires a minimum of one drive and, depending upon the level of
firmware and the stripe-unit size, supports a maximum of eight or 16 drives.
The following illustration shows an example of a RAID level-0 logical drive.
You start with two physical drives.
Create an array using the two physical drives.
Then, create a logical drive within that array.
118
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks. Notice that the data is striped
across all the drives in the array, but no redundant data is stored.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A physical drive failure within the array results in loss of data in the logical drive
assigned RAID level-0, but only in that logical drive. If you have logical drives
assigned RAID level-1, 1E, 5, or 5E in the same array, they will not lose data.
Note: You can assign RAID level-0 only to logical drives in an array that contains
only one physical drive.
When you replace a failed drive, the ServeRAID controller can rebuild all the RAID
level-1E and RAID level-5E logical drives automatically onto the replacement
physical drive. However, any data stored in a failed RAID level-0 logical drive is lost.
Though the risk of data loss is present, you might want to assign RAID level-0 to one
of the logical drives to take advantage of the speed offered with this RAID level. You
could use this logical drive to enter data that you back up each day and for which
safety is not of primary importance, that is, data that you can re-create easily. You also
might want to use a RAID level-0 logical drive when the work you are doing requires
maximum drive capacity.
Understanding RAID Level-1
RAID level-1 provides 100% data redundancy and requires only two physical drives.
With RAID level-1, the first half of a stripe is the original data; the second half of a
stripe is a mirror (that is, a copy) of the data, but written to the other drive in the RAID
level-1 array.
Because the data is mirrored, the capacity of the logical drive when assigned RAID
level-1 is 50% of the array capacity.
The following illustration shows an example of a RAID level-1 logical drive.
You start with two physical drives.
Using IBM ServeRAID
119
Create an array using the two physical drives.
Then, create a logical drive within that array.
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks. Notice that the data on the drive
on the right is a mirror copy of the drive on the left.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
With RAID level-1, if one of the physical drives fails, the ServeRAID controller
switches read and write requests to the remaining functional drive in the RAID level1 array.
Understanding RAID Level-1 Enhanced
If you have three or more physical drives in the array, you can no longer select RAID
level-1, but you can select RAID level-1 Enhanced (also called RAID level-1E).
RAID level-1E combines mirroring with data striping. This RAID level stripes data
and copies of the data across all of the drives in the array. As with the standard RAID
120
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
level-1, the data is mirrored, and the capacity of the logical drive is 50% of the array
capacity of the grouping of physical drives in the array.
RAID level-1E requires a minimum of three drives and, depending upon the level of
firmware and the stripe-unit size, supports a maximum of eight or 16 drives.
The following illustration is an example of an Enhanced RAID level-1 logical drive.
You start with three physical drives.
Create an array using the physical drives.
Then, create a logical drive within that array.
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks. Notice that the stripe labeled ★
is the data stripe and the stripe labeled ★ ★ is the mirror (that is, the copy) of the
preceding data stripe. Also notice that each block on the mirror stripe is shifted one
drive.
*
*x *
*
**
1
2
3
3
1
2
4
5
6
6
4
5
Using IBM ServeRAID
121
With RAID level-1E, if one of the physical drives fails, the ServeRAID controller
switches read and write requests to the remaining functional drives in the RAID level1E array.
Understanding RAID Level-5
RAID level-5 requires a minimum of three physical drives. This RAID level stripes
data and parity across all drives in the array. When an array is assigned RAID level-5,
the capacity of the array is reduced by one drive (for data-parity storage).
RAID level-5 is generally the most desirable choice, because it offers both data
protection and increased throughput. RAID level-5 gives you higher capacity than
RAID level-1, but RAID level-1 offers better performance.
The RAID level-5 requires a minimum of three drives and, depending upon the level
of firmware and the stripe-unit size, supports a maximum of eight or 16 drives.
The following illustration is an example of a RAID level-5 logical drive.
You start with four physical drives.
x
Create an array using three of the physical drives, leaving the fourth as a hot-spare
drive.
x
Then, create a logical drive within that array.
x
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks. Notice that the storage of the
data parity (denoted by ★ ) also is striped, and it shifts from drive to drive.
122
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
*3
x
5
*
1
2
*6
4
7
*8
A parity block (★ ) contains a representation of the data from the other blocks in the
same stripe.
If a physical drive fails in the array, the ServeRAID controller switches read and write
requests to the remaining functional drive in the RAID level-5 array, which is a hotspare drive.
*3
x
5
*
2
1
4
*6
*8
7
Understanding RAID Level-5 Enhanced
RAID level-5 Enhanced (also called RAID level-5E) requires a minimum of four
physical drives. RAID level-5E is also firmware-specific. You can think of RAID level5E as "RAID level-5 with a built-in spare drive."
Reading from and writing to four disk drives is more efficient than three disk drives
and an idle hot spare and therefore improves performance. Additionally, the spare
drive is actually part of the RAID level-5E array, as shown in the following example.
With such a configuration, you cannot share the spare drive with other arrays. If you
want a spare drive for any other array, you must have another spare drive for those
arrays.
Like RAID level-5, this RAID level stripes data and parity across all of the drives in
the array. When an array is assigned RAID level-5E, the capacity of the logical drive is
reduced by the capacity of two physical drives in the array (that is, one for parity and
one for the spare).
RAID level-5E is a very desirable choice, because it offers both data protection and
increased throughput, in addition to the built-in spare drive.
Note: For RAID level-5E, you can have only one logical drive in an array. When
using RAID level-5E, you can have a maximum of seven logical drives on the
controller.
RAID level-5E requires a minimum of four drives and, depending upon the level of
firmware and the stripe-unit size, supports a maximum of eight or 16 drives.
The following illustration is an example of a RAID level-5E logical drive.
You start with four physical drives.
Using IBM ServeRAID
123
x
Create an array using all four physical drives.
Then, create a logical drive (labeled as 1) within the array. Notice that the distributed
spare drive is the free space (labeled as 2) below the logical drive.
1
x
2
The data is striped across the drives, creating blocks in the logical drive. The storage
of the data parity (denoted by ★ ) is striped, and it shifts from drive to drive as it does
in RAID level-5. Notice that the spare drive is not striped.
*4
x
7
1
2
3
*8
5
6
9
*
If a physical drive fails in the array, the data from the failed drive is compressed into
the distributed spare drive. The logical drive remains RAID level-5E. When you
replace the failed drive, the data for the logical drive decompresses and returns to the
original striping scheme.
124
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
*3
x
5
*9
1
2
*6
4
7
*8
*
Note: The ServeRAID Manager program Express configuration does not default to
RAID level-5E. If you have four physical drives, Express configuration
defaults to RAID level-5 with a hot-spare drive.
Selecting a RAID level and performance tuning
When selecting a RAID level for the system, consider the following:1 2
RAID level
Description
RAID level-0
Data redundancy: No
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 100%
Read performance: Excellent
Write performance: Excellent
Built-in spare drive: No
RAID level-1
Data redundancy: Yes
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 50%
Read performance: Very good
Write performance: Very good
Built-in spare drive: No
RAID level1E
Data redundancy: Yes
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 50%
Read performance: Very good
Write performance: Very good
Built-in spare drive: No
RAID level-5
Data redundancy: Yes
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 67% to 94%
Read performance: Excellent
Write performance: Good
Built-in spare drive: No
RAID level5E
Data redundancy: Yes
Hard disk drive capacity utilization: 50% to 88%
Read performance: Excellent
Write performance: Good
Built-in spare drive: Yes
Drive state descriptions
This section provides descriptions of the physical and logical drive states.
1.Depending on the number of physical drives in the array.
2.Performance depends on the number of drives in the array. Generally, the more drives in the array, the better the performance.
Using IBM ServeRAID
125
Physical drive state descriptions
The following table provides descriptions of the valid physical drive states.
Drive State
Defunct
Meaning
A physical drive in the Online, Hot-Spare, or Rebuild state has become defunct. It does not
respond to commands, which means that the ServeRAID controller cannot communicate
properly with the drive.
If a physical drive has become defunct, refer to “Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page 23.
Hot Spare
A Hot-Spare drive is a physical drive that is defined for automatic use when a similar drive
fails.
Online
The drive is Online. It is functioning properly and is part of an array.
Rebuilding
The drive is being rebuilt.
For more information on rebuilding a drive, refer to “Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page
23.
Ready
The ServeRAID controller recognizes a Ready drive as being available for definition.
Standby Hot Spare
A Standby Hot Spare is a Hot-Spare drive that the ServeRAID controller has spun down. If
an Online drive becomes Defunct and no suitable Hot-Spare drive is available, a Standby
Hot-Spare drive of the appropriate size automatically spins up, and enters the Rebuild state.
Logical drive state descriptions
The following table provides descriptions of the valid logical drive states.
Drive State
Blocked
Meaning
During a rebuild operation, the ServeRAID controller sets the state of any RAID level-0 logical
drives associated with a failed array to the Blocked state; then, it reconstructs the data that was
stored in RAID level-1, RAID level-1E, Raid level-5 and RAID level-5E logical drives.
After the Rebuild operation completes, you can unblock the RAID level-0 logical drives, and
access them once again. However, the logical drive might contain damaged data. You must
either re-create, reinstall, or restore the data from the most recent backup disk or tape to the
RAID level-0 logical drive.
Critical Migrating
A logical drive in the critical state that is undergoing a logical drive migration (LDM).
Critical System
The ServeRAID controller uses this reserved state during a logical drive migration (LDM)
when the logical drive is in the critical state.
Critical
A RAID level-1, RAID level-1E, RAID level-5, or RAID level-5E logical drive that contains a
defunct physical drive is in the critical state. A critical logical drive is accessible, despite a
physical drive failure.
Attention:
If the state of the logical drive is critical, refer to “Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page 23.
Migrating
126
The logical drive is undergoing a logical drive migration; that is, a change in RAID levels, a
change in logical drive size, an increase in free space, or a RAID level-5E compression or
decompression.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Drive State
Offline
Meaning
The logical drive is offline and not accessible. This state occurs when one of the following is
true.
•
One or more physical drives in a RAID level-0 logical drive is defunct.
•
Two or more physical drives in a RAID level-1, RAID level-1E, or level-5 logical drive are
defunct.
•
Three or more drives in a RAID level-5E logical drive are defunct.
If any of these are true, refer to “Rebuilding a defunct drive” on page 23.
Okay
The logical drive is okay. It is in a good, functional state.
System
The ServeRAID controller uses this reserved state during logical drive migration (LDM).
Configuring controllers using the ServeRAID Manager program
This chapter provides the information needed to start and use the ServeRAID
Manager program. You can use the ServeRAID Manager program to easily configure
and monitor the ServeRAID controllers. You can also use the ServeRAID Manager
program to configure two ServeRAID controllers in a failover environment.
The information in this chapter is a high level explanation of the ServeRAID Manager
program and its capabilities. For instructions on specific processes using the
ServeRAID Manager program, refer to the ServeRAID Manager online help.
Note: The ServeRAID Manager program works with systems using Microsoft
Windows NT, Windows 95, Windows 98, Novell NetWare, IBM OS/2, and
SCO UnixWare.
Using the ServeRAID Manager program interface
The graphical interface in the ServeRAID Manager program makes it easy for you to
create, delete, change, view and monitor the ServeRAID configuration.
Before you begin, review the following illustration to become familiar with the layout
of the ServeRAID Manager program screens.
Using IBM ServeRAID
127
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 1. ServeRAID Manager program screen layout
Descriptions of the numbered areas are as follows:
1. Menu bar
Provides File, View, Remote, Actions, and Help pull-down menus.
2. Tool bar
Provides quick-path icons for common tasks. The icons from left to right are
Add remote system, Create arrays, Configure for clustering, Scan for new
or removed ready drives, Silence repeating alarm, and Help.
3. Main Tree
Provides an expandable tree view of the ServeRAID subsystem. You will
perform most of the ServeRAID configuration and maintenance tasks by first
128
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
selecting the ServeRAID controller, array, logical drive, hot-spare drive, or
physical drive objects from this Main Tree.
4. Main Panel
Provides specific device information or configuration instructions. When the
ServeRAID Manager program is in the Information mode and you select an
object from the Main Tree, detailed information about the object appears in
this panel. When the ServeRAID Manager program is in the Configuration
mode, the instructions needed to configure the ServeRAID subsystem appear
in this panel.
5. Event viewer
Provides advisory and progressive-status information and messages during
the ServeRAID configuration process and while monitoring systems with
ServeRAID controllers. Each message appears with a host name from where
the event originated, a time stamp, a date stamp, and an icon that classifies
the severity of the event. The event icons are:
•
Information: An "i" inside a blue circle
•
Warning: A "!" inside a yellow triangle
•
Fatal: An "x" inside a red circle
Warning messages identify potential data-loss situations, and Fatal messages
inform you when a failure has occurred. All Fatal messages will launch an
audible alarm.
6. Status bar
Provides three types of information in a resizable panel. The panels contain
the following information:
•
The left panel displays the managed system status, which is either No
problems detected on any system or Problems detected on one or more
systems.
•
The center panel displays the current tree path.
•
The right panel displays a progress meter with the label of the currently
selected system and the process that is taking place at the current time.
Using utility programs
This section provides the information needed to start and use the FlashMan program,
the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration program, and the IPSSEND and IPSMON
command-line programs.
Using FlashMan, the IBM ServeRAID ROM Update
program
FlashMan is an easy to use program that simplifies the updating of BIOS and
firmware on ServeRAID controllers. FlashMan reports the current BIOS version,
firmware version, and update status for each controller found. FlashMan also reports
if a controller needs updating. You decide whether or not to update the controllers,
but you must update all the controllers or none (that is, you cannot selectively
update).
FlashMan is provided on the IBM ServeRAID Support CD packaged with the
ServeRAID controller, and it also is provided on the configuration CD packaged with
some IBM server models.
To access FlashMan:
1.
Insert the IBM ServeRAID Support CD into the system CD-ROM drive.
Using IBM ServeRAID
129
2.
Turn on the system.
3.
The FlashMan splash screen appears. FlashMan automatically scans and
identifies each ServeRAID controller in the system. After scanning completes and
if an update is required, a report screen appears with the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
4.
Controller types found
Controller slot number, if known
Firmware version
BIOS version
Update status. If a controller has down-level BIOS or firmware, the controller
is marked as a candidate for update.
If any of the ServeRAID controller require updating, click Update to update all
marked ServeRAID controllers. The controller BIOS or firmware is updated from
the IBM ServeRAID Support CD or IBM ServeRAID Device Driver Diskette.
FlashMan displays a progress indicator as it updates the controllers. If FlashMan
detects an error, it displays the error message and saves the error message to a file
on the disk.
If you do not want to update the ServeRAID controllers, click Cancel.
5.
When all updates are complete, scroll through the New Feature window. This
window reports the changes that FlashMan applied to the ServeRAID controllers.
Note: When the splash screen appears, you can use Ctrl+L to copy all updated files
to the RAMDISK. Use this keystroke only when instructed by IBM Support.
Using the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration program
The ServeRAID Mini-Configuration program is a quick way to display the current
settings for the ServeRAID controller. You also can use this program to perform a
limited set of the configuration functions without using the IBM ServeRAID Support
CD.
To access the Mini-Configuration program:
1.
Turn on the server. If the server already is turned on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del.
2.
When the ServeRAID Mini-Configuration prompt appears, press Ctrl+I.
3.
If the system contains more than one ServeRAID controller, a selection screen will
appear. To continue:
a.
b.
Use the Up Arrow (Ν) or Down Arrow (∼) key to select a controller.
Press Enter.
If the system contains only one ServeRAID controller, or after you select a
ServeRAID controller, the Main Menu appears.
Descriptions of the choices available from the Main Menu of the MiniConfiguration program are as follows:
4.
130
•
View Controller Status shows the current status of the ServeRAID controller.
(See “Viewing the controller status” on page 131 for more information.)
•
View Configuration shows the current configuration information for the
ServeRAID controller. (See “Viewing the configuration” on page 131 for more
information.)
•
Advanced Functions is used to initialize the configuration, import
configuration from drives, configure BIOS settings, and view the controller
and PCI information. (See “Using the advanced configuration functions” on
page 132 for more information.)
Use the Up Arrow (Ν) or Down Arrow (∼) key to highlight your choice; then, press
Enter.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
5.
Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
6.
Click Exit; then, press Enter.
Viewing the controller status
When you select View Controller Status from the Main Menu, the following
information appears on the screen:
•
All physical drives and their states
•
Unattended shows the current state of the Unattended mode.
— When this option is set to Off, you can choose the recovery method when a
ServeRAID controller startup error occurs.
— When this option is set to On, the ServeRAID controller chooses the recovery
method when a startup error occurs.
•
Read Ahead shows the current state of the read-ahead cache mode.
•
BootCD shows the current state of the Bootable CD-ROM function. (Refer to
“Setting the Bootable CD-ROM feature” on page 132.)
•
CompMode shows the current BIOS compatibility mode. On indicates 8 gigabyte
(GB) Extended; Off indicated 2 gigabyte (GB) Limited.
•
Clustered shows the current state for clustering.
•
BBWC shows the cache size of the battery-backup write cache, if it is installed (8 =
8 MB or 32 = 32 MB) or No if there is a no battery-backup write cache installed.
•
Boot Blk shows the version number of the startable microcode (or firmware)
loaded for the ServeRAID controller.
•
Code Blk shows the current version number of the microcode (or firmware)
loaded for the ServeRAID controller.
•
Rebuild Rate shows the current speed setting for rebuilds: High, Medium, or
Low.
•
Number of Defunct drives shows the current number of Defunct physical drives.
•
Number of Offline drives shows the current number of Offline logical drives.
•
Number of Critical drives shows the current number of Critical logical drives.
•
Config. Updates shows the number of times that the configuration has been
changed since it has been initialized. When you initialize the configuration, the
Config. Update resets to zero.
•
Bad Stripe, Locked Stripe, or Blocked Drive identifies the logical drives that are
affected.
— Bad Stripe Drives indicates logical drives that has inaccessible areas.
— Locked Stripe Drives is a reserved field.
— Blocked Drives indicates the logical drives that are blocked. You must
unblock a blocked drive before you can use it. See “Logical drive state
descriptions” on page 126 for more information.
Viewing the configuration
You can select View Configuration from the Main Menu to display the number of
each logical drive, the size, RAID level, state, stripe-unit size, write policy, read-ahead
status, and creation date for each logical drive.
Using IBM ServeRAID
131
Using the advanced configuration functions
You can select the Advanced Functions to restore the controller configuration to
factory default settings, copy the configuration from drives to controller, configure
BIOS settings, and view the controller and PCI information.
When you select the Advanced Functions from the Main Menu, the following choices
appear on the screen.
Attention:
Be careful when making selections from this menu. If you change the configuration,
you might lose data.
•
Restore to Factory Default Settings is used to reset the configuration. When you
reset the configuration, you will not have access to any data stored on the logical
drives attached to the selected ServeRAID controller.
This choice deletes the existing configuration information, sets all functional
physical drives attached to the controller to the Ready state, and deletes all logical
drives defined for the controller.
This choice does not change any of the ServeRAID controller settings (such as the
stripe-unit size, rebuild rate, and so on) from their current or customized values.
•
Copy the Configuration from Drives to Controller reads the most common
configuration from the drives in the system and copies it to the ServeRAID
controller.
•
Configure BIOS Settings is used to modify the BIOS settings, such as the
Bootable CD-ROM setting, for the ServeRAID controller. (See “Setting the
Bootable CD-ROM feature” for more information.)
Note: The Multiple Controller mode for extra BIOS has two settings: Erase and
Shrink. When this parameter is set to Erase, redundant copies of the
ServeRAID BIOS are erased. When this parameter is set to Shrink, the
redundant copies of the ServeRAID BIOS are removed from memory but
stored in the controller for future use. When you have multiple ServeRAID
controllers installed, you need only one active copy of ServeRAID BIOS.
However, to ensure that you have a copy of the ServeRAID BIOS available
if your active copy becomes defective or unavailable, leave the Multiple
Controller parameter set to Shrink.
•
View Controller and PCI Information shows the ServeRAID controller hardware
and PCI register information.
•
Exit is used to exit from the Mini-Configuration program.
Setting the Bootable CD-ROM feature: When you attach a CD-ROM drive to the
ServeRAID controller and set the Bootable CD-ROM feature to Yes, the ServeRAID
controller will attempt to start a CD that has a bootable startup partition, if no other
controller in the system is currently using INT13 extensions. Only one controller in the
system can support the INT13 extensions.
To enable the Bootable CD-ROM feature:
132
1.
Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu of the Mini-Configuration
program.
2.
Select Configure BIOS Settings from the Advanced Functions menu.
3.
Use the Up Arrow (Ν) and Down Arrow (∼) keys to highlight BIOS Support for
Bootable CD-ROM then press Enter to change No to Yes.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
4.
Ensure that the screen has Yes next to BIOS Support for Reading Partition
Tables. If not, use the Up Arrow (Ν) and Down Arrow (∼) keys to highlight BIOS
Support for Reading Partition Tables; then, press Enter to change No to Yes.
Note: You must perform this next step to save the new settings.
5.
Highlight Save Configuration to the ServeRAID Controller then, press Enter.
The program displays an Okay message and then returns you to the Main Menu of
the Mini-Configuration program.
6.
Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.
Running the IPSSEND program
You can run the IPSSEND program from the operating system command line. When
you run the IPSSEND program with no parameters, a list of available functions and
their specific parameters appears. The following instructions are for running the
IPSSEND program with no parameters. The available functions and their parameters
are described in the sections that follow:
To run the IPSSEND program:
•
If you are using OS/2 or Windows NT:
1.
Type:
c:\ipsadm\ipssend
2.
•
where c is the drive letter of the drive where OS/2 or Windows NT is
installed.
Press Enter.
If you are using NetWare:
1.
From the console, type:
load ipssend
2.
•
Press Enter.
If you are using DOS:
1.
Insert the startable IPSSEND diskette into diskette drive A; then, type:
a:\ipssend
where a is the drive letter of the diskette drive.
2.
•
Press Enter.
If you are using Linux, SCO OpenServer, or UnixWare:
1.
Type:
/usr/bin/ipssend
2.
Press Enter.
Using the IPSSEND program
There are five types of IPSSEND functions:
•
•
•
•
•
FlashCopy
Server roll-out
Error-recovery
Problem-isolation and debug
RAID configuration
Using IBM ServeRAID
133
Server roll-out functions
The IPSSEND server roll-out functions include the following:
backup Use the backup function to save a ServeRAID controller configuration and
BIOS settings to a diskette or to a physical drive. The ServeRAID controller
configuration must be valid.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare and DOS
Command:
ipssend backup controller filename [noprompt]
where:
•
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
filename is the path and file name where the configuration is to be written
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt
copyld Use the copyld function to copy a source logical drive to a target logical drive.
The size of the target logical drive must be greater than or equal to the size of
the source logical drive.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
ipssend copyld controller source target [noprompt]
where:
•
•
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
source is the source logical drive number
target is the target logical drive number
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt.
restore Use the restore function to load a configuration from a file stored on a
diskette or a hard disk. The configuration must be a valid configuration file
from the backup option in IPSSEND. This operation overwrites the existing
configuration information and BIOS settings stored for the ServeRAID
controller.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend restore controller filename [noprompt]
where:
•
•
•
init
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
filename is the path and file name where the configuration is to be written
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt
Use the init function to initialize the first 0.5 MB of a logical drive. This
process will erase the partition tables and all data on the disk.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend init controller drivenum [noprompt]
where:
•
•
•
134
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
drivenum is the logical drive number (1–8)
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
initsync Use the initsync function to initialize and synchronize a logical drive at the
same time. This command works only on RAID level-1 and level-5 logical
drives. The command will erase all data on the entire logical drive.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend initsync controller drivenum [noprompt]
where:
•
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
drivenum is the logical drive number (1–8)
noprompt is an optional parameter that overrides the user prompt
synch Use the synch function to synchronize the parity information on redundant
logical drives. If the parity information is inconsistent, the IPSSEND program
will repair it automatically.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend synch controller drive drivenum
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
scope indicates the number of logical drives:
•
— DRIVE is a single logical drive
— GROUP is a Merge Group
scopeID specifies the scope item:
— If DRIVE, specifies the logical drive number (1–8)
— If GROUP, specifies the Merge Group number
Error-recovery functions
The IPSSEND error-recovery functions include the following:
getstatus
Use the getstatus function to display the current logical-drive status for the
most recent rebuild, synchronization, or logical-drive migration. The status
includes such information as the remaining size of the logical drive, the
percentage completed for the function in process, and information about the
most recently completed logical-drive function.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend getstatus controller
where:
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
rebuild Use the rebuild function to rebuild a designated disk drive. This command is
valid for disk arrays that contain one or more logical drives that are in the
critical state. Progress is indicated during the rebuild operation, but you can
also use the getstatus command to obtain progress information about the
rebuild.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend rebuild controller dch dsid nch nsid
Using IBM ServeRAID
135
where:
•
•
•
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
dch is the channel number for the defunct drive (1–3)
dsid is the SCSI ID for the defunct drive (0–15)
nch is the channel number for the new drive (1–3)
nsid is the SCSI ID for the new drive (0–15)
setstate Use the setstate function to change the state of a physical device from its
current state to a new state.
Attention:
You must be very careful when you use this command. For example, you
might lose data if you reset a defunct device to online without first
performing a rebuild operation.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend setstate controller channel sid nstate
where:
•
•
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
channel is the channel number for the drive (1–3)
sid is the SCSI ID for the drive (0–15)
nstate is the new state for the drive. Valid states are: EMP for Empty, RDY
for Ready, HSP for Hot spare, SHS for Standby hot spare, DDD for
Defunct disk drive, DHS for Defunct hot spare, RBL for Rebuild, SBY for
Standby, and ONL for Online.
unblock Use the unblock function to gain access to a blocked logical drive. RAID
level-0 logical drives become blocked if they are in an array that contains
RAID level-1 or level-5 logical drives and the array is being rebuilt. Because
the RAID level-0 logical drives cannot be rebuilt, the data stored on the RAID
level-0 logical drives is damaged and should not be accessed. After you issue
the unblock command, you must re-create or restore the data previously
stored on the RAID level-0 logical drives.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend unblock controller drivenum
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
drivenum is the logical drive number (1–8)
Problem-isolation and debug commands
The IPSSEND problem-isolation and debug commands include the following:
certify Use the certify function to verify the media of a physical drive. When the
program finds a media error, it reassigns the sectors. A summary of
reassignments and PFA errors appears upon completion of the verification.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
ipssend certify controller channel sid
where:
•
136
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
•
•
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)
eraseevent
Use the eraseevent function to clear all logged entries in the designated event
log. See GETEVENT help for information about the contents of the device
event log and the controller soft and hard event logs.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend eraseevent controller options
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
options is the designated event log:
— DEVICE for the device event log
— SOFT for the ServeRAID controller soft event log
— HARD for the ServeRAID controller hard event log
getbst Use the getbst function to display the number of bad stripes in the bad stripe
table for each logical drive.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, Unixware, and DOS
Command:
ipssend getbst controller
where:
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
fmstatus Use the fmstatus function to display the progress of a format operation
currently processing.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
ipssend fmstatus controller channel sid
where:
•
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)
format Use the format function to perform a low-level format of a physical drive.
Attention:
1.
When you issue this command, all data on the disk will be lost.
2.
After a format command is issued, do not stop it. If a format process is
stopped for any reason, the hard disk that was being formatted will not
respond to any commands except the format command. Thus, the
ServeRAID controller will not be able to recognize commands anymore.
To recover the drive, refer to “Recovering from an incomplete format of a
physical drive” on page 24.
Supported operating system: DOS
Command:
ipssend format controller channel sid
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)
Using IBM ServeRAID
137
•
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)
getevent Use the getevent function to display information about various unexpected
events. IBM uses the soft and hard event logs for development and
debugging purposes only. The device event log contains event counters for
each attached physical device. These counters include:
•
Parity: An unexpected event occurred while data was being transferred
on the SCSI bus. This usually indicates a problem with the SCSI cable,
connectors, or terminators.
•
Soft: A SCSI device detected a check-condition event.
•
Hard: The SCSI controller detected an unexpected event. The controller is
the most likely cause.
•
Misc: The ServeRAID controller detected an event that was most likely
caused by the device.
The device event log also provides Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA) alerts,
which indicate that the device has signaled the ServeRAID controller that it
might fail in the near future.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend getevent controller options
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
options is the designated event log:
— DEVICE for the device event log
— SOFT for the ServeRAID controller soft event log
— HARD for the ServeRAID controller hard event log
selftest The selftest function is used to direct a controller or a device to perform its
self-test.
Supported operating systems: DOS
Command:
ipssend selftest controller options
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
options is the designated self-test:
— AD for the ServeRAID controller self-test
— PD channel sid for the device self-test
Note: channel represents the drive channel, and sid is the SCSI ID for
the device.
startdely Use the startdely function to set the number of drives in a group to start up
simultaneously and to set the delay in seconds between the startup of these
groups of drives.
Supported operating systems: DOS
Command:
ipssend startdely controller options
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
options is one of the following:
— ? displays the concurrent drive startup count and the delay time.
138
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
— A number (1–16) that specifies the new concurrent drive startup
count
— A number (1–16) that specifies the new concurrent drive startup
count and a number (3–15) that specifies the startup delay time, in
seconds.
RAID Configuration commands
The IPSSEND RAID configuration commands include the following:
drivever Use the drivever function to display the vendor ID, microcode version, and
serial number of a SCSI device. The IPSSEND program retrieves this
information directly from the device.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend drivever controller channel sid
where:
•
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
channel is the channel number for the device (1, 2, or 3)
sid is the SCSI ID for the device (0–15)
getconfig
Use the getconfig function to display the ServeRAID controller configuration
information. This includes information about the firmware version; initiator
ID and rebuild rate; logical-drive status, RAID level, and size; and physical
device type, SCSI ID, and PFA error.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend getconfig controller options
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
options is one of the following:
—
—
—
—
AD for the controller information
LD for the logical drive information
PD for the physical device information
AL for all information. This is the default option.
hsrebuild
Use the hsrebuild function to turn on the ServeRAID controller hot-swap
rebuild feature or display the current status of the hot-swap rebuild feature.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, UnixWare, and DOS
Command:
ipssend hsrebuild controller options
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
options is one of the following:
— ON enables the hot-swap feature
— ? displays the status of the hot-swap rebuild feature.
readahead
Use the readahead function to enable, disable, or set the adaptive mode for
the read-ahead feature of the ServeRAID controller.
Using IBM ServeRAID
139
Supported operating systems: Windows NT and DOS
Command:
ipssend readahead controller options
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
options is one of the following:
— ON enables the read-ahead feature
— OFF disables the read-ahead feature
— ADAPTIVE indicates that the controller will determine the best mode
to use at any given time.
— ? displays the current read-ahead feature mode being used.
stripesize
Use the stripesize function to set the size of the ServeRAID controller's stripe
to 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, or 64 KB.
Supported operating systems: DOS
Command:
ipssend stripesize controller options
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
options is one of the following:
—
—
—
—
—
8 to set the stripe-unit size to 8 KB
16 to set the stripe-unit size to 16 KB
32 to set the stripe-unit size to 32 KB
64 to set the stripe-unit size to 64 KB
? to display the current stripe-unit size being used
unattended
Use the unattended command to enable or disable the unattended feature of
the ServeRAID controllers.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux,
OpenServer, Unixware, and DOS
Command:
ipssend unattended controller options
where:
•
•
controller is the ServeRAID controller number (1–12)
options is one of the following:
— ON to enable the feature
— OFF to disable the feature
— ? to display the current setting of this feature
Starting the IPSMON program
You can run the IPSMON program from the operating system command line.
To start the IPSMON program:
•
If you are using OS/2 or Windows NT:
1.
Type:
c:\ipsadm\ipsmon
where c is the drive letter of the drive where OS/2 or Windows NT is
installed.
140
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
2.
•
Press Enter.
If you are using Novell NetWare:
1.
From the console, type:
load ipsmon
2.
•
Press Enter.
If you are using Linux, SCO OpenServer, or UnixWare:
1.
Type:
/usr/bin/ipsmon
2.
Press Enter.
Using the IPSMON program
When you start the IPSMON monitoring program, it immediately begins polling all
ServeRAID controllers for specific conditions. If a condition being monitored is
found, this program logs a message to the screen, to a file, or to both the screen and a
file.
Supported operating systems: Windows NT, OS/2, NetWare, Linux, OpenServer,
UnixWare
Command:
ipsmon options
where:
•
options is one of the following optional parameters:
— -F:filename to specify the name of the file in which to record messages. The
default file name is IPSMON.LOG.
— -S to display messages on the standard output (usually the monitor)
— -? to obtain a current list of valid parameters
Note: If you start this program without any command-line parameters, the
IPSMON program will log the messages to the IPSMON.LOG file, and the
messages will not appear on the screen.
After you start the IPSMON program, the program will continuously poll the
ServeRAID controllers until you take one of the following actions:
•
If you are using Windows NT or OS/2, press Ctrl+C.
•
If you are using NetWare, type unload ipsmon at the system console.
•
If you are using OpenServer or UnixWare, press the Del key to cancel the
program.
During operation, the program will log various messages. Each message will contain
an alert code and a location specifier.
•
The alert code begins with the message type and number; for example, INF,
WRN, or CRT (followed by the message number).
•
The location specifier comes after the alert code:
A followed by the controller number
SID followed by the SCSI ID (if required)
C followed by the channel number (if required)
For example, a message of CRTxxx:A2C3SID04 signifies that a Critical condition
(CRTxxx) was found on Controller 2 (A2), Channel 3 (C3), SCSI ID 4 (SID04).
Using IBM ServeRAID
141
The IPSMON program can log the following messages, based on the required
condition.
Information Messages:
<Date and Time> INF000:A1C-SID-- no errors detected
<Date and Time> INF001:A1C-SID-- rebuild started
<Date and Time> INF002:A1C-SID-- rebuild completed
<Date and Time> INF003:A1C-SID-- synchronization started
<Date and Time> INF004:A1C-SID-- synchronization completed
<Date and Time> INF005:A1C-SID-- migration started
<Date and Time> INF006:A1C-SID-- migration completed
Warning Messages:
<Date and Time> WRN001:A2C3SID12 PFA Error detected
Critical Messages:
<Date and Time> CRT001:A3C2SID04 dead drive detected
<Date and Time> CRT002:A1C-SID-- not responding to commands
142
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Symptom-to-FRU index
This index supports xSeries 250 servers.
Notes:
1.
Check the configuration before you replace a FRU. Configuration problems can
cause false errors and symptoms.
2.
The default configuration can be loaded by starting the system and then pressing
the reset button four times, waiting 15 seconds between each press. Once the
configuration has reset to the default, it must be saved in Setup to be stored in
CMOS.
3.
For IBM devices not supported by index, refer to the manual for that device.
4.
Always start with “General checkout” on page 1.
The Symptom-to-FRU lists symptoms, errors, and the possible causes. The most
likely cause is listed first. Use this Symptom-to-FRU index to help you decide which
FRUs to have available when servicing the computer. The POST BIOS displays POST
error codes and messages on the screen.
Beep symptoms
Beep symptoms are short tones or a series of short tones separated by pauses
(intervals without sound). See the following examples.
Note: One beep after successfully completing POST indicates the system is
functioning properly.
Beeps
1-2-3
Description
•
One beep
•
A pause (or break)
•
Two beeps
•
A pause (or break)
•
Three Beeps
Four continuous beeps
4
Beep/Symptom
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
FRU/Action
1-1-3 (CMOS write/read
test failed)
1.
Battery
2.
I/O Legacy Board
1-1-4 (BIOS EEPROM
checksum failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
1-2-1 (Programmable
Interval Timer failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
1-2-2 (DMA initialization
failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
1-2-3 (DMA page register
write/read failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
143
Beep/Symptom
1-2-4 (RAM refresh
verification failed)
1.
DIMM
2.
Processor/PCI Board
3.
Memory Card
1.
DIMM
2.
Processor/PCI Board
3.
Memory Card
1-3-2 (1st 64K RAM parity
test failed)
1.
DIMM
2.
I/O Legacy board
2-1-1 (Secondary DMA
register failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2-1-2 (Primary DMA
register failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2-1-3 (Primary interrupt
mask register failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2-1-4 (Secondary interrupt
mask register failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2-2-2 (Keyboard controller
failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2.
Keyboard
2-2-3 (CMOS power failure
and checksum checks
failed)
1.
Battery
2.
I/O Legacy board
2-2-4 (CMOS configuration
info validation failed)
1.
Battery
2.
I/O Legacy board
2-3-1 (Screen initialization
failed)
1.
Jumper on J6
2.
I/O Legacy Board
2-3-2 (Screen memory
failed)
1.
I/O Legacy board
2-3-3 (Screen retrace failed)
1.
I/O Legacy board
2-3-4 (Search for video
ROM failed)
1.
I/O Legacy board
2-4-1 (Video failed, screen
believed operable)
1.
I/O Legacy board
3-1-1 (Timer tick interrupt
failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
3-1-2 (Interval timer channel
2 failed)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
3-1-3 (RAM test failed
above address OFFFF h))
1.
DIMM
2.
Memory card
3.
Processor/PCI board
4.
I/O Legacy board
3-1-4 (Time-Of-Day clock
failed)
1.
Battery
2.
I/O Legacy Board
3-2-1 (Serial port failed)
1.
I/O Legacy board
1-3-1 (1st 64K RAM test
failed)
144
FRU/Action
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Beep/Symptom
FRU/Action
3-2-2 (Parallel port failed)
1.
I/O Legacy board
3-2-3 (Math coprocessor
failed)
1.
Optional processor (if installed)
2.
Processor
3.
Processor/PCI board
1.
DIMM
2.
Processor/PCI board
3.
Battery
4.
I/O Legacy board
3-3-1 (Memory size
mismatch occurred, see
"Memory Settings" on page
49)
1.
DIMM
2.
Processor/PCI board
3.
Battery
3-3-2 (Critical SMBUS error
occurred)
1.
Disconnect the server power cord from outlet, wait 30
seconds and retry.
2.
I/O Legacy Board
3.
Processor/PCI Board
4.
DIMMs
5.
Memory Card
6.
DASD Backplane
7.
Power Supply
8.
Power Supply Backplane
9.
12C Cable
1.
Install or reseat the memory modules, then power-on the
system (see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
program” on page 45).
2.
If problem persists, restart the system 3 times.
3-2-4 (Failure comparing
CMOS memory size against
actual)
3-3-3 (No operational
memory in system)
Note:
Restarting the system three times will load default
settings.
3.
DIMMs
4.
Memory Board
5.
Processor/PCI Board
6.
I/O Legacy Board
Two Short Beeps
(Information only, the
configuration has changed)
1.
Run Diagnostics
2.
Run Configuration/Setup
Three Short Beeps
1.
DIMM
2.
Processor/PCI Board
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Processor
2.
Optional Processor (if installed)
3.
Processor/PCI Board
4.
I/O Legacy Board
One Continuous Beep
Symptom-to-FRU index
145
Beep/Symptom
FRU/Action
1.
Keyboard
2.
I/O Legacy Board
One Long and One Short
Beep
1.
Video adapter (if present)
2.
I/O Legacy Board
One Long and Two Short
Beeps
1.
Video adapter (if present)
2.
I/O Legacy Board
Two Long and Two Short
Beeps
1.
Video adapter
Repeating Short Beeps
No beep symptoms
No Beep Symptom
FRU/Action
No beep and the system
operates correctly.
1.
Diagnostic LED Panel
No Beeps occur after
successfully completing
POST (The Power-On
Status is disabled.)
1.
Run Configuration/Setup, set the Start Options Power-On
Status to enable.
2.
Diagnostic LED Panel
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Check the power cord.
2.
Power Supply (If two are installed, swap them to determine
if one is defective.)
3.
Power Backplane
No beep and no video
1.
See “Undetermined problems” on page 170
System will not powerup (Power supply ac
LED is on)
1.
See“Power supply LED errors” on page 154
No ac power (Power
supply ac LED is off)
Diagnostic panel LEDs
The system error LED is turned on when an error is detected. If the system error LED
is on, remove the cover and check the diagnostic panel LEDs. The following is a
complete list of diagnostic panel LEDs followed by the FRU/Action for correcting the
problem.
Note: If a diagnostic panel LED is on and the information LED panel system error
LED is off, there is probably an LED problem. Run LED diagnostics.
Notes:
1.
2.
3.
146
To locate the LEDs on the processor board see “Processor board component
locations” on page 55.
Check the System Error Log for additional information before replacing a FRU.
It may be necessary to view the system error log from a remote connection, such
as MOST.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
4.
The memory card DIMM error LEDs, processor error LEDs, and VRM error LEDs
turn off when the system is powered down.
Diagnostic Panel LED
FRU/Action
1.
System Error Log is 75% full; clear the log.
2.
Bad, missing or mis-installed processor terminator; remove
and reinsert terminator.
3.
PFA alert; check log for failure; clear PFA alert; remove AC
power for at least 20 seconds, reconnect, then power up
system.
4.
If failure reading I2C device, check devices on bus "X"; see
“I2C bus fault messages” on page 169.
5.
Run Information Panel diagnostics.
CPU LED on
(The LED next to the failing
CPU should be on.)
1.
Processor 1, 2, 3, or 4.
2.
Processor/PCI Board.
VRM LED on
(The LED next to the failing
VRM should be on.)
1.
Corresponding voltage regulator module.
2.
Processor/PCI Board.
DASD LED on
(Check amber drive LED
for a failing hard drive.)
1.
Be sure the fans are operating correctly and the air flow is
good.
2.
Failing drive.
3.
SCSI Backplane.
1.
Check individual fan LEDs.
2.
Replace respective fan.
3.
Fan Cable.
4.
Processor/PCI Board.
5.
I/O Legacy Board.
6.
Power Backplane Board.
1.
Failing DIMM(s) in slot J1-J16.
2.
Memory Card.
3.
Processor/PCI Board.
1.
Reboot the system.
2.
Check the System Error Log.
1.
PCI Card in slot 1 or 2. See “Processor board component
locations” on page 55.
2.
Remove all PCI adapters from slots 1-6.
3.
Processor/PCI Board
4.
I/O Legacy Board.
1.
Card in slots 3-6.See “Processor board component
locations” on page 55.
2.
Remove all PCI adapters from slots 1-6.
3.
Processor/PCI Board.
4.
I/O Legacy Board.
All LEDs off
(Check System Error Log
for error condition, then
clear System Error Log
when the problem is
found.)
FAN LED on
MEM LED on (The LED
next to the failing DIMM is
on.)
NMI LED on
PCI A LED on
PCI B LED on
Symptom-to-FRU index
147
Diagnostic Panel LED
FRU/Action
1.
Remove all PCI adapters from slots 1-6.
2.
Processor/PCI Board.
3.
I/O Legacy Board.
1.
Check the DC Good LED on power supply 1. If off,
replace power supply 1.
2.
Power Backplane.
1.
Check the DC Good LED on power supply 2. If off,
replace power supply 2.
2.
Power Backplane.
1.
Check the DC Good LED on power supply 3. If off,
replace power supply 3.
2.
Power Backplane.
1.
Check the DC Good LED on power supply 4. If off,
replace power supply 4.
2.
Power Backplane.
SMI LED on
1.
Reboot the system.
TEMP LED on
1.
Ambient temperature must be within normal operating
specifications. See “Features and specifications” on page 3,
and “Temperature error messages” on page 166.
2.
Ensure fans are operating correctly.
3.
Examine System Error Log.
PCI C LED on
PS1 LED on
PS2 LED on
PS3 LED on
PS4 LED on
a.
System over recommended temperature
1)
Information LED Panel
2)
b.
c.
d.
I/O Legacy Board
DASD over recommended temperature (DASD LED
also on)
1)
Overheating hard drive
2)
DASD Backplane
3)
I/O Legacy Board
System over recommended temperature for CPU X
(where X is CPU 1, 2, 3, or 4) (CPU LED also on)
1)
CPU X
2)
Processor/PCI Board
I/O Legacy Board over recommended temperature
1)
Processor/PCI Board
2)
I/O Legacy Board
Diagnostic error codes
Note: In the following error codes, if XXX is 000, 195, or 197 do not replace a FRU.
The description for these error codes are:
148
000
The test passed.
195
The Esc key was pressed to abort the test.
197
This is a warning error and may not indicate a hardware failure.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
For all error codes, replace/follow the FRU/Action indicated.
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
001-XXX-000 (Failed core tests)
1.
Processor/PCI Board
001-XXX-001 (Failed core tests)
1.
Processor/PCI Board
001-250-000 (Failed System
Board ECC)
1.
Processor/PCI Board
001-250-001 (Failed Processor
Board ECC)
1.
Processor/PCI Board
005-XXX-000 (Failed Video test) 1.
Video Adapter (if installed)
2.
I/O Legacy Board
011-XXX-000 (Failed COM1
Serial Port test)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
011-XXX-001 (Failed COM2
Serial Port test)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
014-XXX-000 (Failed Parallel
Port test)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
015-XXX-001 (USB interface not
found. Board damaged.)
1.
I/O Legacy Board.
015-XXX-015 (Failed USB
External Loopback Test)
1.
Make sure parallel port is not disabled.
2.
Re-run USB External Loopback Test.
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Remove USB devices from USB1 and USB2.
2.
Re-run test.
3.
I/O Legacy Board
020-XXX-000 (Failed PCI
Interface test)
1.
Processor/PCI Board
2.
System Board
020-XXX-001 (Failed Hot-Swap
Slot 1 PCI Latch test)
1.
PCI Hot-Swap Latch Assembly
2.
Processor/PCI Board
020-XXX-002 (Failed Hot-Swap
Slot 2 PCI Latch test)
1.
PCI Hot-Swap Latch Assembly
2.
Processor/PCI Board
020-XXX-003 (Failed Hot-Swap
Slot 3 PCI Latch test)
1.
PCI Hot-Swap Latch Assembly
2.
Processor/PCI Board
020-XXX-004 (Failed Hot-Swap
Slot 4 PCI Latch test)
1.
PCI Hot-Swap Latch Assembly
2.
Processor/PCI Board
030-XXX-000 (Failed Internal
SCSI interface test)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
030-XXX-00N (Failed SCSI test
on PCI slot N. Check system
error log before replacing a
FRU.)
1.
Adapter
035-XXX-099
1.
No adapters were found.
2.
If adapter is installed re-check connection.
015-XXX-198 (USB device
connected during USB test)
Symptom-to-FRU index
149
Error Code/Symptom
1.
Cable
2.
SCSI Backplane
3.
Adapter
035-XXX-SNN (Check System
Error Log before replacing a
FRU.
S = number of failing
PCI slot; NN = SCSI ID of
failing fixed disk.)
1.
Fixed Disk with SCSI ID NN on RAID adapter in
PCI slot S.
035-253-S99 (RAID adapter
initialization failure)
1.
ServeRAID Adapter in slot S is not configured
properly. Obtain the basic and extended configuration
status and refer to the ServeRAID Hardware
Maintenance Manual for more information.
2.
Cable
3.
SCSI Backplane
4.
Adapter
075-XXX-000 (Failed Power
Supply test)
1.
Power Supply
089-XXX-001 (Failed
Microprocessor test)
1.
VRM for Microprocessor 1
2.
Microprocessor
089-XXX-002 (Failed Optional
Microprocessor test)
1.
VRM for Optional Microprocessor 2
2.
Optional Microprocessor
089-XXX-003 (Failed Optional
Microprocessor test)
1.
VRM for Optional Microprocessor 3
2.
Optional Microprocessor
089-XXX-004 (Failed Optional
Microprocessor test)
1.
VRM for Optional Microprocessor 4
2.
Optional Microprocessor
165-XXX-000 (Failed Service
Processor test)
1.
Check error log for any I2C messages (see “I2C bus
fault messages” on page 169).
2.
Remove ac power from system for 20 seconds, then
rerun service processor test. If problem persists,
proceed to step 3..
3.
I/O Legacy Board. Before replacing the I/O Legacy
Board, ensure that I/O Legacy Board jumper J28 is not
installed (the default) when the error occurs.
180-XXX-000 (Diagnostics LED
failure)
1.
Run Diagnostic LED test for the failing LED.
180-XXX-001 (Failed
information LED panel test)
1.
Information LED Panel
2.
Diagnostic LED Panel
3.
I/O Legacy Board
180-XXX-002 (Failed
Diagnostics LED Panel test)
1.
Diagnostics LED Panel
2.
I/O Legacy Board
180-XXX-003 (Failed System
Board LED test)
1.
System Board
180-XXX-004 (Failed Processor
Board LED test)
1.
Processor/PCI Board
2.
I/O Legacy Board
035-XXX-S99 (Failed RAID test
on PCI slot S. S = number of
failing PCI slot. Check System
Error Log before replacing a
FRU.)
150
FRU/Action
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Error Code/Symptom
180-XXX-005 (Failed SCSI
Backplane LED test)
180-XXX-006 (Memory Board
LED test)
FRU/Action
1.
SCSI Backplane
2.
SCSI Backplane Cable
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Memory Board
2.
Processor/PCI Board
3.
I/O Legacy Board
201-XXX-0NN (Failed Memory 1.
test, see "Memory Settings" on
2.
page 49.) NN = DIMM location.
DIMM Location J1-J16
Memory card
201-XXX-999 (Multiple DIMM
failure, see error text.)
1.
See error text for failing DIMMs
2.
Memory card
202-XXX-001 (Failed System
Cache test)
1.
VRM 1
2.
Microprocessor CPU 1
202-XXX-002 (Failed System
Cache test)
1.
VRM 2
2.
Microprocessor CPU 2
202-XXX-003 (Failed System
Cache test)
1.
VRM 3
2.
Microprocessor CPU 3
202-XXX-004 (Failed System
Cache test)
1.
VRM 4
2.
Microprocessor CPU 4
206-XXX-000 (Failed Diskette
Drive test)
1.
Cable
2.
Diskette Drive
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
CD-ROM Drive Cables
2.
CD-ROM Drive
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Fixed Disk 1
1.
Fixed Disk 2
1.
Fixed Disk 3
215-XXX-000 (Failed IDE CDROM test)
217-XXX-000 (Failed BIOS Fixed
Disk test)
Note:
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-001 (Failed BIOS
Fixed Disk test)
Note:
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-002 (Failed BIOS
Fixed Disk test)
Note:
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
Symptom-to-FRU index
151
Error Code/Symptom
217-XXX-003 (Failed BIOS
Fixed Disk test)
Note:
152
Fixed Disk 6
1.
Fixed Disk 7
1.
Fixed Disk 8
1.
Fixed Disk 9
1.
Fixed Disk 10
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-009 (Failed BIOS
Fixed Disk test)
Note:
1.
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-008 (Failed BIOS Fixed
Disk test)
Note:
Fixed Disk 5
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-007 (Failed BIOS
Fixed Disk test)
Note:
1.
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-006 (Failed BIOS
Fixed Disk test)
Note:
Fixed Disk 4
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-005 (Failed BIOS
Fixed Disk test)
Note:
1.
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
217-XXX-004 (Failed BIOS
Fixed Disk test)
Note:
FRU/Action
If RAID is configured,
the fixed disk number
refers to the RAID
logical array.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Error Code/Symptom
264-XXX-0NN (NN = SCSI ID
of failing Tape Drive)
FRU/Action
1.
Tape Cartridge, if user executed the Read/Write Tape
Drive test (XXX = 256)
2.
SCSI or power cable connected to the tape drive with
SCSI ID NN
3.
Tape drive with SCSI ID NN – refer to Help and
Service Information appendix of tape drive’s User
Guide.
4.
I/O Legacy Board or SCSI Controller – run SCSI
Controller diagnostic to determine of SCSI bus is
functioning properly.
264-XXX-999 (Errors on
multiple tape drives, see error
text for more info)
1.
See error messages/text in the PC Doctor error log for
detailed information on each individual tape drive
error.
301-XXX-000 (Failed Keyboard
test)
1.
Keyboard
405-XXX-000 (Failed Ethernet
test on controller on the I/O
Legacy Board)
1.
Verify that Ethernet is not disabled in BIOS.
2.
I/O Legacy Board
405-XXX-00N (Failed Ethernet
test on adapter in PCI slot N)
1.
Adapter in PCI slot N.
2.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Cable
2.
Modem
3.
I/O Legacy Board
Note:
Insure modem is
present and attached to
server.
415-XXX-000 (Failed Modem
test)
Error symptoms
Error Symptom
CD is not working properly.
CD-ROM drive tray is not
working. (The server must be
powered-on.)
CD-ROM drive is not recognized.
FRU/Action
1.
Clean the CD.
2.
Run CD-ROM diagnostics.
3.
CD-ROM Drive
1.
Insert the end of a paper clip into the manual trayrelease opening.
2.
Run CD-ROM diagnostics.
3.
CD-ROM Drive
1.
Run Configuration/Setup, enable primary IDE
channel.
2.
Check cables and jumpers.
3.
Check for correct device driver.
4.
Run CD-ROM diagnostics.
5.
CD-ROM drive
6.
I/O Legacy Board
Symptom-to-FRU index
153
Error Symptom
FRU/Action
Power switch does not work and
reset button does work.
Diskette drive in-use light stays
on, or the system bypasses the
diskette drive, or the diskette
drive does not work.
Monitor problems (general).
Some IBM monitors have their
own self-tests. If you suspect a
problem with the monitor, refer to
the information that comes with
the monitor for adjusting and
testing instructions.
1.
Verify that the power-on control jumper on J23 is
on pins 1 and 2.
2.
Power Switch Assembly
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
If there is a diskette in the drive, verify that:
a.
The diskette drive is enabled in the
Configuration/Setup utility program.
b.
The diskette is good and not damaged. (Try
another diskette if you have one.)
c.
The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive.
d.
The diskette contains the necessary files to
start the server.
e.
The software program is OK.
f.
Cable is installed correctly (proper orientation)
2.
Run Diskette Drive Diagnostics.
3.
Cable
4.
Diskette Drive
5.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Monitor
2.
Run Video Diagnostics. If diagnostics pass, the
problem may be a video driver.
3.
Display Adapter / I/O Legacy Board
Power supply LED errors
Use the power supply LED information on the following page to troubleshoot power
supply problems.
Note: The minimum configuration required for the DC Good light to come on is:
•
•
•
•
AC Good
LED
Off
154
Power Supply
Power Backplane
Processor/PCI Board (with pins 2 and 3 on J23 connected together to
bypass the power switch; see “Processor board jumpers” on page 57).
Processor/PCI Board (Verify that Processor/PCI Board and I/O Legacy
Board are properly connected together; see “Processor board component
locations” on page 55.
DC Good
LED
Off
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Description
No power to system or
ac problem.
FRU/Action
1.
Check ac power to system.
2.
Power Supply
AC Good
LED
On
DC Good
LED
Off
Description
Standby mode or dc
problem.
FRU/Action
1.
Move jumper on J23 to pins 2-3 to
bypass power control. If the DC
Good LED comes on, press
Ctrl+Alt+Delete. Watch the screen
for any POST errors. Check the
System Error Log for any listed
problems.
If
the system powers up with no
errors:
a.
On
On
Power is OK.
Power Switch Assembly
2.
Remove the adapters and
disconnect the cables and power
connectors to all internal and
external devices. Power-on the
system. If the DC Good LED
comes on, replace the adapters and
devices one at a time until you
isolate the problem.
3.
Power Supply
4.
Power Backplane
5.
I/O Legacy Board
6.
Processor Board
N/A
POST error codes
In the following error codes, X can be any number or letter.
Error Code/Symptom
062 (Three consecutive boot
failures using the default
configuration.)
101, 102 (System and processor
error)
FRU/Action
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Battery
3.
I/O Legacy Board
4.
Processor/PCI Board
5.
Processor
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2.
Processor/PCI Board
106 (System and processor error) 1.
111 (Channel check error)
114 (Adapter read-only memory
error)
I/O Legacy Board
2.
Processor/PCI Board
1.
Failing adapter
2.
DIMM
3.
I/O Legacy board
1.
Failing adapter
2.
Run diagnostics
Symptom-to-FRU index
155
Error Code/Symptom
129 (Internal cache error)
FRU/Action
1.
Processor
2.
Optional processor (if installed)
3.
Processor/PCI board
1.
Run Diagnostics
2.
Battery
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Battery
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Battery
3.
Failing Device
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Battery
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
DIMM
3.
Processor/PCI Board
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2.
Processor/PCI Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
I/O Legacy Board
3.
C2 Security Switch
177, 178 (Security hardware
error)
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
I/O Legacy Board
184 (Power-on password
corrupted)
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
I/O Legacy Board
185 (Drive startup sequence
information corrupted)
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
I/O Legacy Board
186 (Security hardware control
logic failed)
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
I/O Legacy Board
151 (Real time clock error)
161 (Real time clock battery
error)
162 (Device Configuration
Error)
Note:
Be sure to load the
default settings and any
additional desired
settings; then, save the
configura-tion.
163 (Real-Time Clock error)
164 (Memory configuration
changed, see "Memory Settings"
on page 49.)
175 (Hardware error)
176 (Computer cover or cable
cover was removed without a
key being used)
187 (VPD serial number not set.) 1.
188 (Bad EEPROM CRC #2)
189
(An attempt
was made to access the server
with invalid passwords)
156
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Set serial number in Setup
2.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup, enter the administrator
password
2.
I/O Legacy Board.
Error Code/Symptom
FRU/Action
201 (Memory test error, see
"Memory Settings" on page 49.)
If the server does not have the
latest level of BIOS installed,
update the BIOS to the latest
level and run the diagnostic
program again.
1.
Run memory diagnostics.
2.
DIMM
3.
Memory card
4.
Processor/PCI Board
5.
I/O Legacy Board
229 (Cache error)
1.
Processor
2.
Optional Processor (if installed)
3.
Processor/PCI Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup, if disabled by user
2.
Disabled DIMM, if not disabled by user.
3.
Processor/PCI Board
301 (Keyboard or keyboard
controller error)
1.
Keyboard
2.
I/O Legacy Board
303 (Keyboard controller error)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2.
Keyboard
1.
Diskette
2.
Diskette Drive
3.
Cable
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup and Diagnostics
2.
Diskette Drive
3.
Drive Cable
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Diskette drive
2.
Drive cable
3.
I/O Legacy board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup and Diagnostics
2.
Diskette Drive
3.
Drive Cable
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup utility
2.
Battery
3.
Processor
4.
Processor/PCI board
1.
Disconnect external cable on parallel port.
2.
Run Configuration/Setup
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Disconnect external cable on serial port.
2.
Run Configuration/Setup
3.
I/O Legacy Board
289 (DIMM has been disabled by
user or system, see "Memory
Settings" on page 49.)
602 (Invalid diskette boot
record)
604 (Diskette drive error)
605 (Unlock error)
662 (Diskette drive configuration
error)
762 (Coprocessor configuration
error)
962 (Parallel port error)
11XX (System board serial port 1
or 2 error)
Symptom-to-FRU index
157
Error Code/Symptom
1301 (cable to front panel not
found)
1302 (cable from system board
to power on and reset switches
not found)
1303 (cable from system board to
power backplane not found)
1304 (cable to diagnostic LED
board not found)
1600 (The Service Processor is
not functioning) Do the
following before replacing a
FRU:
1.
Ensure that a jumper is not
installed on J51.
2.
Remove the ac power to the
system, wait 20 seconds;
then, re-connect the ac
power. Wait 30 seconds;
then, power-on the system.
1601 (The system is able to
communicate to the Service
Processor, but the Service
Processor failed to respond at the
start of POST.) Do the following
before replacing a FRU:
1.
Remove the ac power to the
system, wait 20 seconds;
then, re-connect the ac
power. Wait 30 seconds;
then, power-on the system.
2.
Flash update the Service
Processor.
1762 (Fixed Disk Configuration
error)
158
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
FRU/Action
1.
Cable
2.
Front Panel
3.
Power Switch Assembly
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Cable
2.
Power Switch Assembly
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Cable
2.
Power Backplane
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Cable
2.
Diagnostic LED Board
3.
Power Switch Assembly
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2.
Processor/PCI Board
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2.
Processor/PCI Board
1.
Fixed Disk Drive
2.
Fixed Disk Cables
3.
Run Configuration/Setup
4.
Fixed Disk Adapter
5.
SCSI Backplane
6.
I/O Legacy Board
Error Code/Symptom
178X (Fixed Disk error)
FRU/Action
1.
Fixed Disk Cables
2.
Run Diagnostics
3.
Fixed Disk Adapter
4.
Fixed Disk Drive
5.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Failing Adapter
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Verify a bootable operating system is installed.
2.
If RAID system, refer to the IBM ServeRAID
Hardware Maintenance Manual for more
information.
3.
Run Diagnostics
4.
Hard Disk Drive
5.
Cable
6.
SCSI Backplane
7.
I/O Legacy Board
2400 (Video controller test
failure)
1.
Video Adapter (if installed)
2.
I/O Legacy Board
2462 (Video memory
configuration error)
1.
Video Adapter (if installed)
2.
I/O Legacy Board
5962 (IDE CD-ROM
configuration error)
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
CD-ROM Drive
3.
CD-ROM Power Cable
4.
IDE Cable
5.
I/O Legacy Board
6.
Battery
1.
Pointing Device
2.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Processor
2.
Optional Processor
3.
Processor/PCI Board
1.
VRM 1
2.
Processor 1
3.
Processor Board
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
VRM 2
2.
Processor 2
3.
Processor Board
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1800 (No more hardware
interrupt available for PCI
adapter)
1962 (Drive does not contain a
valid boot sector)
8603 (Pointing Device Error)
00012000 (Machine check
architecture error)
00019501 (Processor 1 is not
functioning - check VRM and
processor LEDs)
00019502 (Processor 2 is not
functioning - check VRM and
processor LEDs)
Symptom-to-FRU index
159
Error Code/Symptom
1.
VRM 3
2.
Processor 3
3.
Processor Board
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
VRM 4
2.
Processor 4
3.
Processor/PCI Board
4.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Processor 1
2.
Processor/PCI Board
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Processor 2
2.
Processor/PCI Board
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Processor 3
2.
Processor/PCI Board
3.
I/O Legacy Board
00019704 (Processor 4 failed
BIST)
1.
Processor 4
2.
Processor/PCI Board
00180100 (No room for PCI
option ROM)
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Failing Adapter
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Failing Adapter
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Failing Adapter
3.
I/O Legacy Board
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Failing Adapter
3.
I/O Legacy Board
00180500 (PCI option ROM
checksum error)
1.
Remove Failing PCI Card
2.
I/O Legacy Board
00180600 (PCI device built-in
self test failure)
1.
Run Configuration/Setup
2.
Failing Adapter
3.
I/O Legacy Board
00180700, 00180800 (General PCI
error)
1.
I/O Legacy Board
2.
PCI Card
01295085 (ECC checking
hardware test error)
1.
Processor/PCI Board
2.
Processor
00019503 (Processor 3 is not
functioning - check VRM and
processor LEDs)
00019504 (Processor 4 is not
functioning - check VRM and
processor LEDs)
00019701 (Processor 1 failed
BIST)
00019702 (Processor 2 failed
BIST)
00019703 (Processor 3 failed
BIST)
00180200 (No more I/O space
available for PCI adapter)
00180300 (No more memory
(above 1MB for PCI adapter)
00180400 (No more memory
(below 1MB for PCI adapter)
160
FRU/Action
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Error Code/Symptom
01298001 (No update data for
processor 1)
FRU/Action
1.
Ensure all processors are the same stepping level
and cache size.
2.
Processor 1
1.
Ensure all processors are the same stepping level
and cache size.
2.
Processor 2
1.
Ensure all processors are the same stepping level
and cache size.
2.
Processor 3
1.
Ensure all processors are the same stepping level
and cache size.
2.
Processor 4
1.
Ensure all processors are the same stepping level
and cache size.
2.
Processor 1
1.
Ensure all processors are the same stepping level
and cache size.
2.
Processor 2
1.
Ensure all processors are the same stepping level
and cache size.
2.
Processor 3
1.
Ensure all processors are the same stepping level
and cache size.
2.
Processor 4
1.
Hard Disk Drive
2.
If RAID system, refer to the ServeRAID Hardware
Maintenance Manual for more information.
3.
SCSI Backplane
4.
Cable
5.
I/O Legacy Board
I9990305 (Fixed boot sector
error, no operating system
installed)
1.
Install operating system to hard disk drive.
I9990650 (AC power has been
restored)
1.
Check cable
2.
Check for interruption of power supply
3.
Power Cable
01298002 (No update data for
processor 2)
01298003 (No update data for
processor 3)
01298004 (No update data for
processor 4)
01298101 (Bad update data for
processor 1)
01298102 (Bad update data for
processor 2)
01298103 (Bad update data for
processor 3)
01298104 (Bad update data for
processor 4)
I9990301 (Fixed boot sector
error)
ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error codes
The ISPR (Interrupt Status Port Register), BCS (Basic Configuration Status), and ECS
(Extended Configuration Status) codes identify the controller state.
Note: Do not replace a system board containing a ServeRAID adapter unless such a
replacement is a specifically recommended Action.
Symptom-to-FRU index
161
ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error procedures
The ISPR Error Procedures list errors, symptoms, and the possible causes. The most
probable cause is listed first. Use these procedures to help you solve ServeRAID
problems when servicing the computer.
EF10 (Default ISPR)
1.
No ISPR Error Present.
1XXX (Microcode Checksum Error)
1.
Replace the ServeRAID controller.
2XXX thru 5XXX (Code DRAM Error)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install two download jumpers parallel to the PCI slots. For jumper locations, see
“Processor board component locations” on page 55.
Flash the controller with the latest IBM ServeRAID BIOS/Firmware from the IBM
Website.
Remove the jumpers.
If the error persists, replace ServeRAID controller.
6XXX (Cache DRAM Error)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reseat Cache Memory SIMM.
Install two download jumpers parallel to the PCI slots. For jumper locations, see
“Processor board component locations” on page 55.
Flash the controller with the latest IBM ServeRAID BIOS/Firmware from the IBM
Website.
Remove the jumpers.
If the error persists, replace ServeRAID controller.
7XXX thru 8XXX (Host/Local PCI Bus Interface Error)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install two download jumpers parallel to the PCI slots. For jumper locations,
“Processor board component locations” on page 55.
Flash the controller with the latest IBM ServeRAID BIOS/Firmware from the IBM
Website.
Remove the jumpers.
If the error persists, replace ServeRAID controller.
9XXX thru BXXX (SCSI bus error caused either by defective drives, termination, etc.)
1.
Isolate between SCSI subsystem and controller by disconnecting all SCSI cables
from suspect card, and reboot.
CAUTION:
Do not press F5. Doing so changes the customer’s configuration.
If an ISPR error is still present, perform the following actions until the error is no
longer present:
a.
b.
Reseat the controller.
Replace the controller.
Notes:
a.
2.
162
The controller detects a configuration change. Do not choose Save
Changes.Instead, press F10 to bypass any options to this effect.
If ISPR error is EF10 after disconnecting cables:
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
a.
Identify which channel is causing the error by the second digit of the original
ISPR code:
ISPR = B1xx = Channel 1
ISPR = B2xx = Channel 2
ISPR = B3xx = Channel 1 and 2
ISPR = B4xx = Channel 3
ISPR = B5xx = Channel 1 and 3
ISPR = B6xx = Channel 2 and 3
ISPR = B7xx = Channel 1, 2 and 3
ISPR = BFxx = Channel not identified
b.
Confirm that the channel(s) identified from the error in step 2 is(are) the cause
of the error by verifying that the error presents itself ONLY when the
offending channel is reconnected.
c.
Check termination of identified channel.
d. Check for proper backplane jumper configuration.
e.
Check for proper cabling configuration in systems that use DASD status
cables. Reconnect all cables removed in step 1 above.
f.
Disconnect one drive at a time attached to the channel identified in step 2a,
then reboot to determine which drive is causing the error.
g.
Replace SCSI cable.
h. Replace SCSI backplane.
EF10 (Default ISPR)
1.
No ISPR error present.
2.
Controller is probably functioning properly. Do not replace system board unless
you have run the controller’s diagnostics and you get an error message. If you do
not get an error message, assume it is functioning properly.
3.
Refer to “Using IBM ServeRAID” on page 117. Note the resulting BCS and or
ECS Error codes, and see the FRU actions respective to those codes. (EF10 is a
default code for ISPR indicating that there is no ISPR error present.)
EFFE (Firmware code corrupted or download jumpers are in place.)
1.
Verify download jumpers are in their default locations. See “Processor board
component locations” on page 55 for jumper locations.
2.
If download jumpers are not in place and error still persists, then flash the
controller firmware with the jumpers in place; then remove the jumpers.
3.
If error persists after step 2 , replace the controller or the system board with
integrated controller.
FFFF or other code not listed
1.
Isolate between SCSI subsystem and controller by disconnecting all SCSI cables
attached to the suspect controller and reboot. If ISPR code is EF10 after
disconnecting cables, follow the steps below until the error is eliminated:
a.
Identify which channel is causing the error by reconnecting cables one at a
time and rebooting until the error returns.
b.
Check termination of identified channel in step a..
c.
Disconnect one drive at a time attached to channel identified in stepa. and
reboot each time to determine which drive is causing the problem.
d. Replace SCSI Cable attached to channel identified in step a..
e.
Replace Backplane attached to channel identified in step a..
Symptom-to-FRU index
163
2.
If original ISPR code is still present after disconnecting all SCSI cables and
rebooting, perform the following actions until the error is no longer present:
•
Reseat the controller.
•
Replace the controller.
ServeRAID
This index supports ServeRAID 3HB Adapters and Controllers. It lists symptoms,
errors, and possible causes.
Note: Do not replace any FRU until you have followed the POST (ISPR) error
procedures (see “ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error procedures” on page 162).
Only replace a ServeRAID 3HB Adapter or controller if ind8icated to do so in
the POST (ISPR) error procedures.
Error Code/Symptom
1xxx (flash checksum error)
1.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
2xxx (code DRAM error)
1.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
2.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
1.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
2.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
1.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
2.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
1.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
2.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
1.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
2.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
1.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
2.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
1.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
2.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
1.
Reseat Cache Memory SIMM
2.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
3.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
2601 to 260B (POST detected error with
ServeRAID subsystem)
2610 (POST detected error with
ServeRAID controller hardware)
2620 (POST detected ServeRAID
configuration or hard disk error)
3xxx (NVRAM error)
4xxx (timer/cache memory controller
error)
5xxx (cache memory controller error)
6xxx (cache DRAM error)
164
Action
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Error Code/Symptom
7xxx (host/local PCI bus interface error)
Action
1.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
2.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
1.
Install download jumpers, flash latest level
BIOS and firmware for adapter. Remove
jumpers.
2.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
1.
Refer to “ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error
procedures” on page 162.
2.
SCSI cable
3.
SCSI backplane
4.
Hard drive
5.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
Axxx (SCSI I/O port error)
1.
Refer to “ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error
procedures” on page 162.
Bxxx (SCSI bus interface error)
1.
Refer to “ServeRAID POST (ISPR) error
procedures” on page 162.
2.
SCSI cable
3.
SCSI backplane
4.
Hard drive
5.
ServeRAID 3HB Adapter/Controller
8xxx (SCSI I/O port error)
9xxx (SCSI termination error)
SCSI error codes
Error Code
1.
A failing SCSI device (adapter, drive,
controller)
External SCSI devices must be
powered-on before you power-on the
server.
2.
An improper SCSI configuration or SCSI
termination jumper setting
The cables for all external SCSI devices
are connected correctly.
3.
If you have attached an external SCSI
device to the server, make sure the
external SCSI termination is set to
automatic.
4.
The last device in each SCSI chain is
terminated correctly.
5.
The SCSI devices are configured
correctly.
All SCSI Errors One or more of the following
might be causing the problem:
•
•
FRU/Action
•
Duplicate SCSI IDs in the same SCSI chain
•
A missing or improperly installed SCSI
terminator
•
A defective SCSI terminator
•
An improperly installed cable
•
A defective cable
Symptom-to-FRU index
165
Temperature error messages
Message
Action
DASD "X" Over Temperature (levelcritical; Direct Access Storage Device bay
"X" was over temperature)
1.
Ensure system is being properly cooled;
see “Temperature checkout” on page 32.
DASD Over recommended Temperature
(sensor X) (level-warning; the DASD
backplane had an over temperature
condition)
1.
Ensure system is being properly cooled;
see “Temperature checkout” on page 32.
DASD under recommended temperature
(sensor X) level-warning; the DASD
backplane had an under temperature
condition)
1.
Ambient temperature must be within
normal operating specifications; (see
“Features and specifications” on page 3).
Power Supply "X" Temperature Fault
(level-critical; power supply "x" had over
temperature condition)
1.
Ensure system is being properly cooled;
see “Temperature checkout” on page 32.
2.
Replace Power Supply "X"
System board is over recommended
temperature (level-warning; system board
is over recommended temperature)
1.
Ensure system is being properly cooled;
see “Temperature checkout” on page 32.
2.
Replace system board
System board is under recommended
temperature (level-warning; system board
is under recommended temperature)
1.
Ambient temperature must be within
normal operating specifications; (see
“Features and specifications” on page 3).
System over temperature for CPU "X"
(level-warning; CPU "X" reporting over
temperature condition)
1.
Ensure system is being properly cooled;
see “Temperature checkout” on page 32.
2.
Replace CPU "X".
3.
Replace Processor/PCI Board.
1.
Ambient temperature must be within
normal operating specifications; (see
“Features and specifications” on page 3).
2.
Replace CPU "X".
3.
Replace Processor/PCI Board.
System under recommended CPU "X"
temperature (level-warning; system
reporting under temperature condition for
CPU "X")
Fan error messages
Message
Fan "X" failure (level-critical; fan "X" had a
failure)
Fan "X" fault (level-critical; fan "X" beyond
recommended RPM range)
166
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Action
1.
Check connections to fan "X"
2.
Replace fan "X"
1.
Check connections to fan "X"
2.
Replace fan "X"
Power error messages
Message
Action
Power supply "X" current fault (level-critical;
excessive current demand on power supply
"X")
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
Power supply "X" DC good fault (levelcritical; power good signal not detected for
power supply "X")
1.
Replace power supply "X"
Power supply "X" fan fault (level-critical; fan
fault in power supply "X")
1.
Replace power supply "X"
Power supply "X" fault (level-critical;
overcurrent condition exists)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
Power supply "X" 12V fault (level-critical;
overcurrent condition detected)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
Power supply "X" 3.3V fault
(level-critical; 3.3V power supply "X" had an
error)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
Power supply "X" 5V fault (level-critical; 5V
power supply "X" had an error)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
System over recommended "X" current
(level-non-critical; system running too much
current on that voltage)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
System running non-redundant power
(level-non-critical; system does not have
redundant power)
1.
Add another power supply
2.
Remove options from system
3.
System can continue to operate without
redundancy protection if 1 and 2 above
are not followed.
1.
Check connections to power
subsystem
2.
Replace power supply
3.
Replace power backplane
1.
Check connections to power
subsystem
2.
Replace power supply
3.
Replace power backplane
System under recommended voltage for "X"
v (level-warning; indicated voltage supply
under nominal value; value for "X" can be +12,
-12, or +5)
System under recommended voltage on 3.3 v
(level-warning; 3.3 volt supply under nominal
value)
System under recommended X current (level- 1.
non-critical; system drawing less current than
recommended on voltage "X")
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
"X" V bus fault (level-critical; overcurrent
condition on "X" voltage bus)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
12V "X" bus fault (level-critical; overcurrent
condition on 12 volt "X" voltage bus)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
5V fault (level-critical; overcurrent condition
on 5 V subsystem)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
240 VA bus fault (level-critical; overcurrent or
overvoltage condition in power subsystem)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
Symptom-to-FRU index
167
System shutdown
Refer to the following tables when experiencing system shutdown related to voltage
or temperature problems.
Power related system shutdown
Message
Action
System powered off due to "X" current over
max value (level-critical; system drawing too
much current on voltage "X" bus)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
System shutoff due to "X" current under min
value (level-critical; current on voltage bus
"X" under minimum value)
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
System shutoff due to "X" V over voltage
(level-critical; system shutoff due to "X"
supply over voltage)
1.
Check power supply connectors
2.
Replace power supply
3.
Replace power backplane
1.
Check power supply connectors
2.
Replace power supply
3.
Replace power backplane
1.
See “Power checkout” on page 32.
System shutoff due to "X" V under voltage
(level-critical system shutoff due to "X"
supply under voltage)
System powered off due to faults on each
power supply.
Temperature related system shutdown
Message
System shutoff due to board over temperature
(level-critical; processor board is over
temperature)
System shutoff due to CPU "X" over
temperature (level-critical; CPU "X" is over
temperature)
System shutoff due to CPU "X" under
temperature (level-critical; CPU "X" is under
temperature)
Action
1.
Ensure system is being properly
cooled, see “Temperature checkout” on
page 32.
2.
Replace processor board
1.
Ensure system is being properly
cooled, see “Temperature checkout” on
page 32.
2.
Replace CPU "X"
1.
Ambient temperature must be within
normal operating specifications (see
“Features and specifications” on page
3.
2.
System shutoff due to DASD temperature
(sensor X) (level-critical; DASD area reported
temperature outside recommended operating
range)
168
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
1.
Ensure system is being properly
cooled, see “Temperature checkout” on
page 32.
Message
Action
System shutoff due to high ambient
temperature (level-critical; high ambient
temperature)
1.
Ambient temperature must be within
normal operating specifications (see
“Features and specifications” on page
3.
System shutoff due to system board under
temperature (level-critical; system board is
under temperature)
1.
Ambient temperature must be within
normal operating specifications (see
“Features and specifications” on page
3.
DASD checkout
Message
Action
Hard drive (SCSI ID "X") removal detected
(level-critical; hard drive "X" has been
removed)
1.
Information only, take action as
appropriate.
Hard drive (SCSI ID "X") fault
1.
Replace hard drive (SCSI ID "X").
Host Built-In Self Test (BIST) checkout
Message
Action
Host BIST fail (level-informational; host’s
built-in self test failed)
1.
Reseat CPU
2.
Reseat VRM
3.
Replace CPU
I2C bus fault messages
Message
Action
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices
on bus 0.
1.
Replace I/O Legacy Board
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices
on bus 1.
1.
Reseat I/O Legacy Board
2.
Reseat power supplies
3.
Replace power supply
4.
Replace Power Backplane
5.
Replace I/O Legacy Board
Symptom-to-FRU index
169
Message
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices
on bus 2.
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices
on bus 3.
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices
on bus 4.
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices
on bus 5.
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices
on bus 6.
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices
on bus 7.
Failure reading I2C device. Check devices
on bus 8.
Action
1.
Reseat front panel connector
2.
Reseat diagnostics panel connector
3.
Reseat I/O Legacy Board
4.
Replace front panel
5.
Replace diagnostics panel
6.
Replace Power Backplane
7.
Replace I/O Legacy Board
1.
Reseat VRMs
2.
Reseat Processor/PCI Board
3.
Replace VRMs
4.
Replace Processor/PCI Board
5.
Replace I/O Legacy Board
1.
Reseat Power Backplane/DASD power
cable
2.
Reseat I/O Legacy Board
3.
Replace Power Backplane/DASD power
cable
4.
Replace DASD Backplane
5.
Replace Power Backplane
6.
Replace I/O Legacy Board
1.
Reseat CPUs
2.
Reseat Processor/PCI Board
3.
Replace CPUs
4.
Replace Processor/PCI Board
5.
Replace I/O Legacy Board
1.
Reseat memory card
2.
Reseat Processor/PCI Board
3.
Replace memory card
4.
Replace Processor/PCI Board
5.
Replace I/O Legacy Board
1.
Reseat Processor/PCI Board
2.
Replace Processor/PCI Board
3.
Replace I/O Legacy Board
1.
Replace I/O Legacy Board
Undetermined problems
You are here because the diagnostic tests did not identify the failure, the Devices List
is incorrect, or the system is inoperative.
170
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Notes:
1.
A corrupt CMOS can cause undetermined problems.
2.
A faulty I2C Bus can cause undetermined problems. Check the system error log
for any I2C Bus errors; see “I2C bus fault messages” on page 169.
Check the LEDs on all the power supplies, see“Power supply LED errors” on page
154. If the LEDs indicate the power supplies are working correctly, return here and do
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Power-off the computer.
Be sure the system is cabled correctly.
Remove or disconnect the following (one at a time) until you find the failure
(power-on the computer and reconfigure each time).
Any external devices
Surge suppressor device (on the computer)
Modem, printer, mouse, or non-IBM devices
Each adapter
Hard disk drives
Memory-Modules (Minimum requirement = 512 MB (4x128 MB DIMMs))
Note: Minimum operating requirements are:
a.
b.
c.
4.
1 Power Supply
Power Backplane
Processor/PCI Board (with pins 2 and 3 on J23 connected together to
bypass the power switch; default is pins 1 and 2)
d. I/O Legacy Board (Verify that connection to Processor/PCI Board is
secure.)
e. 1 Microprocessor and VRM
f. 3 Terminator Cards
g. Memory Modules (with a minimum of 1 bank of four 128 MB DIMMs
(4x128))
Power-on the computer. If the problem remains, suspect the following FRUs in
the order listed:
Power Supply
Power Backplane
Processor/PCI Board
I/O Legacy Board
Notes:
1.
If the problem goes away when you remove an adapter from the system, and
replacing that adapter does not correct the problem, suspect the Processor/PCI
Board, then the I/O Legacy Board.
2.
If you suspect a networking problem and all the system tests pass, suspect a
network cabling problem external to the system.
Symptom-to-FRU index
171
172
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Parts listing (Type 8665)
Part A
1
2
3
A
14
SMI
DASD1
MEM
NON
RED
OVER
SPEC
PS1
NMI
CPU
PS2
SP
VRM
PS3
PCIA
FAN
PCIB
PCIC
TEMP
PS4
13
12
11
5
4
6
10
7
8
9
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
173
System
Note: Components of the shuttle (A) are shown in “Part B” on page 175.
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
174
System (xSeries 250) Models 6RY, 7RY, 8RY, 61Y, 71Y, 81Y
DASD fan assembly w/bracket (All models)
LVD SCSI backplane (Audi) (All models)
Power supply backplane assembly (Models 61Y, 71Y, 81Y)
Hot swap power supply 250W (All models)
Power supply filler assembly (2) (All models)
Chassis (All models)
Front bezel (All models)
Hard disk drive bezel filler assembly (All models)
Blank 5.25 bezel assembly (All models)
40X CD-ROM (All models)
1.44MB diskette drive (All models)
Trim bezel (All models)
Front LED card assembly (All models)
Diagnostic switch card (All models)
Media trim bezel assembly (All models)
Bezel assembly (All models)
Bezel (All models)
Front door (Models 61Y, 71Y, 81Y)
Power switch cover (All models)
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
FRU No.
37L6314
24P4003
37L6329
36L8819
00N6405
37L6316
37L6335
37L0198
00N6407
19K1517
76H4091
37L0260
37L6328
37L6327
06P5959
06P5955
19K1231
06P5981
09N7764
Part B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12
9
10
11
Parts listing (Type 8665)
175
System
Index
1
2
3
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
176
System (xSeries 250) Models 6RY, 7RY, 8RY, 61Y, 71Y, 81Y
Terminator card (All models)
Memory card (All models)
700MHZ/1MB cache (Models 6RY, 61Y)
700MHZ/2MB cache (Models 7RY, 71Y)
900MHZ/2MB cache (Models 8RY, 81Y)
Dual voltage regulator module assembly (All models)
Misc. processor kit (Models 1RY, 2RY) (contains processor guide (2),
VRM guide (8), VRM guide retainer (4), memory card guide (2)) (All
models)
I/O legacy label (All models)
Processor/PCI board with backerplate assembly (All models)
Rear fan assembly w/bracket (All models)
Shuttle (All models)
I/O Legacy card assembly w/backerplate (Snark) (All models)
Front fan assembly w/bracket (All models)
I/O fan assembly w/bracket (All models)
Processor terminator case (All models)
Processor retention bracket (All models)
40X CD-ROM (2nd source) (All models)
CD-ROM 5.25 rail (All models)
Misc. hot swap kit #2 (Model 1RY, 2RY) (contains PCI handles (4),
blank fillers (4), PCI clamps (4), M3x5 screw (5), insulator (5), switch
housing (1), card guide (2), guide retainers) (All models)
Misc. hot plug kit (All models)
Top cover (All models)
Left EIA side flange assembly (All models)
Right EIA side flange assembly (All models)
Cam handle lever (All models)
Shuttle eject lever (All models)
PCI handle (All models)
EMI shield (All models)
PCI switch card (All models)
PCI switch, single (All models)
Bracket, floppy disk drive (All models)
Slide assembly
128MB DIMM (4) (All models)
256MB DIMM (All models)
512MB DIMM (All models)
1GB DIMM (All models)
Service label (All models)
Battery (All models)
Shuttle power cable (All models)
Power cable-power backplane to SCSI backplane (All models)
Power cable-power backplane to CD (All models)
Signal cable-power backplane to SCSI backplane (All models)
Signal cable-power backplane to 5.25 bays (All models)
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
FRU No.
94H0598
24P1631
19K0982
19K0983
23P1421
24P6804
37L6340
37L6318
37L6337
37L6325
37L6320
06P4117
37L6324
37L6326
10L6936
37L6319
36L8791
00N6412
00N6776
33L3707
12J3063
00N6794
00N6795
03K9083
37L6317
37L6322
37L6323
37L0178
00N6830
12J3065
00N6839
33L3114
33L3116
33L3118
33L3120
06P5973
33F8354
37L0126
37L0132
37L0130
37L0147
37L0149
Index
System (xSeries 250) Models 6RY, 7RY, 8RY, 61Y, 71Y, 81Y
Signal cable diskette drive (All models)
Signal cable-power backplane to CD-ROM (All models)
Signal cable (All models)
Power cable-processor to rear processor (All models)
Power cable-processor to front fans (All models)
Power cable-power backplane to hard disk drive fans (All models)
FRU No.
37L0144
37L0146
06P5975
37L0134
37L0136
37L0131
Keyboards
Keyboard
US English
French Canadian
LA Spanish
Arabic
Belgium/French
Belgium/UK
Bulgarian
Czech
Danish
Dutch
French
German
Greek
Hebrew
Hungarian
Korean
Iceland
Italy
Norwegian
Polish
Portuguese
Romanian
Russian
Serbian/Cyrillic
Slavic
Spanish
Swedish/Finn
Swiss, F/G
Turkish
Turkish
UK English
Yugosl/Lat
US English-EMEA
Chinese/US
Thailand
French Canadian
FRU No.
37L2551
37L2552
37L2553
37L2555
37L2556
37L2557
37L2558
37L2559
37L2560
37L2561
37L2562
37L2563
37L2564
37L2565
37L2566
02K0901
37L2567
37L2568
37L2569
37L2570
37L2571
37L2572
37L2573
37L2574
37L2575
37L2576
37L2577
37L2578
37L2579
37L2580
37L2581
37L2582
37L2583
37L2585
37L2587
37L0913
Parts listing (Type 8665)
177
Power cords
Power cord
China (PRC)
01K9851
Japan
01K9853
Thailand
12J5120
Israel
12J5122
Bangladesh, Burma, India, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka
12J5124
Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, Somalia
12J5126
Argentina, Australia, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea, Paraguay,
Uruguay, Western Samoa
12J5128
Antigua, Bahrain, Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus, Dubai, Fiji,
Ghana, Hong Kong, Iraq, Ireland, Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi, Malaysia,
Malta, Nepal, Nigeria, Polynesia, Qatar, Sierra Leone, Singapore,
Tanzania, Uganda, United Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia
12J5987
Afghanistan, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Austria, Belgium, Benin,
Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cameroon, Central African Rep.,
Chad, Czech Republic, Egypt, Finland, France, French Guiana,
Germany, Greece, Guinea, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Ivory
Coast, Jordan, Lebanon, Luxembourg, Macau, Malagasy, Mali,
Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco, Mozambique,
Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland, Portugal,
Romania, Senegal, Slovakia, Spain, Sudan, Sweden, Syria, Togo,
Tunisia, Turkey, former USSR, Vietnam, former Yugoslavia, Zaire,
Zimbabwe
55H6643
Denmark, Switzerland, Liechtenstein
55H6646
Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Cayman
Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Korea
(South), Liberia, Mexico, Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama,
Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Suriname, Taiwan, Trinidad (West
Indies), Venezuela
76H4865
United States of America
178
FRU No.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
6952301 (110) 1838574
(220) 36L8886
(220V/15A)
Related service information
Note: The service procedures are designed to help you isolate problems. They are
written with the assumption that you have model-specific training on all
computers, or that are familiar with the computers, functions, terminology,
and service information provided in this manual.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
179
Safety information
The following section contains the safety information that you need to be familiar
with before servicing an IBM mobile computer.
General safety
Follow these rules to ensure general safety:
•
Observe good housekeeping in the area of the machines during and after
maintenance.
•
When lifting any heavy object:
1.
Ensure you can stand safely without slipping.
2.
Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.
3.
Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you attempt to
lift.
4.
Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg muscles; this action removes
the strain from the muscles in your back. Do not attempt to lift any objects that
weigh more than 16 kg (35 lb) or objects that you think are too heavy for you.
•
Do not perform any action that causes hazards to the customer, or that makes the
equipment unsafe.
•
Before you start the machine, ensure that other service representatives and the
customer's personnel are not in a hazardous position.
•
Place removed covers and other parts in a safe place, away from all personnel,
while you are servicing the machine.
•
Keep your tool case away from walk areas so that other people will not trip over
it.
•
Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the moving parts of a machine.
Ensure that your sleeves are fastened or rolled up above your elbows. If your hair
is long, fasten it.
•
Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside clothing or fasten it with a
nonconductive clip, approximately 8 centimeters (3 inches) from the end.
•
Do not wear jewelry, chains, metal-frame eyeglasses, or metal fasteners for your
clothing.
Remember: Metal objects are good electrical conductors.
•
Wear safety glasses when you are: hammering, drilling soldering, cutting wire,
attaching springs, using solvents, or working in any other conditions that might
be hazardous to your eyes.
•
After service, reinstall all safety shields, guards, labels, and ground wires.
Replace any safety device that is worn or defective.
•
Reinstall all covers correctly before returning the machine to the customer.
Electrical safety
CAUTION:
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables can be
180
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
hazardous. To avoid personal injury or equipment damage, disconnect the attached
power cords, telecommunication systems, networks, and modems before you open
the server covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration
procedures.
Observe the following rules when working on electrical equipment.
Important: Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have
handles covered with a soft material that does not insulate you when
working with live electrical currents.
Many customers have, near their equipment, rubber floor mats that
contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic discharges. Do
not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
•
Find the room emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or
electrical outlet. If an electrical accident occurs, you can then operate the switch
or unplug the power cord quickly.
•
Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has
hazardous voltages.
•
Disconnect all power before:
— Performing a mechanical inspection
— Working near power supplies
— Removing or installing main units
•
Before you start to work on the machine, unplug the power cord. If you cannot
unplug it, ask the customer to power-off the wall box that supplies power to the
machine and to lock the wall box in the off position.
•
If you need to work on a machine that has exposed electrical circuits, observe the
following precautions:
— Ensure that another person, familiar with the power-off controls, is near you.
Remember: Another person must be there to switch off the power, if
necessary.
— Use only one hand when working with powered-on electrical equipment;
keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back.
Remember: There must be a complete circuit to cause electrical shock. By
observing the above rule, you may prevent a current from passing through
your body.
— When using testers, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe
leads and accessories for that tester.
— Stand on suitable rubber mats (obtained locally, if necessary) to insulate you
from grounds such as metal floor strips and machine frames.
Observe the special safety precautions when you work with very high voltages;
these instructions are in the safety sections of maintenance information. Use
extreme care when measuring high voltages.
•
Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational
condition.
•
Do not use worn or broken tools and testers.
•
Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. First, check that it
has been powered-off.
•
Always look carefully for possible hazards in your work area. Examples of these
hazards are moist floors, nongrounded power extension cables, power surges,
and missing safety grounds.
Related service information
181
•
Do not touch live electrical circuits with the reflective surface of a plastic dental
mirror. The surface is conductive; such touching can cause personal injury and
machine damage.
•
Do not service the following parts with the power on when they are removed
from their normal operating places in a machine:
— Power supply units
— Pumps
— Blowers and fans
— Motor generators
and similar units. (This practice ensures correct grounding of the units.)
•
If an electrical accident occurs:
— Use caution; do not become a victim yourself.
— Switch off power.
— Send another person to get medical aid.
Safety inspection guide
The intent of this inspection guide is to assist you in identifying potentially unsafe
conditions on these products. Each machine, as it was designed and built, had
required safety items installed to protect users and service personnel from injury. This
guide addresses only those items. However, good judgment should be used to
identify potential safety hazards due to attachment of non-IBM features or options not
covered by this inspection guide.
If any unsafe conditions are present, you must determine how serious the apparent
hazard could be and whether you can continue without first correcting the problem.
Consider these conditions and the safety hazards they present:
•
Electrical hazards, especially primary power (primary voltage on the frame can
cause serious or fatal electrical shock).
•
Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or bulging capacitor
•
Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware
The guide consists of a series of steps presented in a checklist. Begin the checks with
the power off, and the power cord disconnected.
Checklist:
182
1.
Check exterior covers for damage (loose, broken, or sharp edges).
2.
Power-off the computer. Disconnect the power cord.
3.
Check the power cord for:
a.
A third-wire ground connector in good condition. Use a meter to measure
third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between the external ground
pin and frame ground.
b.
The power cord should be the appropriate type as specified in the parts
listings.
c.
Insulation must not be frayed or worn.
4.
Remove the cover.
5.
Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety
of any non-IBM alterations.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
6.
Check inside the unit for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings,
contamination, water or other liquids, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7.
Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
8.
Check that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not been
removed or tampered with.
Handling electrostatic discharge-sensitive devices
Any computer part containing transistors or integrated circuits (ICs) should be
considered sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). ESD damage can occur when
there is a difference in charge between objects. Protect against ESD damage by
equalizing the charge so that the machine, the part, the work mat, and the person
handling the part are all at the same charge.
Notes:
1.
Use product-specific ESD procedures when they exceed the requirements noted
here.
2.
Make sure that the ESD protective devices you use have been certified (ISO 9000)
as fully effective.
When handling ESD-sensitive parts:
•
Keep the parts in protective packages until they are inserted into the product.
•
Avoid contact with other people.
•
Wear a grounded wrist strap against your skin to eliminate static on your body.
•
Prevent the part from touching your clothing. Most clothing is insulative and
retains a charge even when you are wearing a wrist strap.
•
Use the black side of a grounded work mat to provide a static-free work surface.
The mat is especially useful when handling ESD-sensitive devices.
•
Select a grounding system, such as those listed below, to provide protection that
meets the specific service requirement.
Note: The use of a grounding system is desirable but not required to protect
against ESD damage.
— Attach the ESD ground clip to any frame ground, ground braid, or green-wire
ground.
— Use an ESD common ground or reference point when working on a doubleinsulated or battery-operated system. You can use coax or connector-outside
shells on these systems.
— Use the round ground-prong of the ac plug on ac-operated computers.
Grounding requirements
Electrical grounding of the computer is required for operator safety and correct
system function. Proper grounding of the electrical outlet can be verified by a
certified electrician.
Safety notices (multi-lingual translations)
The caution and danger safety notices in this section are provided in the following
languages:
•
English
•
Brazilian/Portuguese
Related service information
183
•
Chinese
•
French
•
German
•
Italian
•
Korean
•
Spanish
Important: All caution and danger statements in this IBM documentation begin with
a number. This number is used to cross reference an English caution or
danger statement with translated versions of the caution or danger
statement in this section.
For example, if a caution statement begins with a number 1, translations
for that caution statement appear in this section under statement 1.
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements before performing any
of the instructions.
•
Statement 1
DANGER
Electrical current from power, telephone and communication cables is hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
•
Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance,
or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm.
•
Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet.
•
Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this
product.
•
When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.
•
Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or
structural damage.
•
Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks,
and modems before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in
the installation and configuration procedures.
•
Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices.
To Connect
•
184
To Disconnect
1.
Turn everything OFF.
1.
Turn everything OFF.
2.
First, attach all cables to devices.
2.
First, remove power cords from outlet.
3.
Attach signal cables to connectors.
3.
Remove signal cables from connectors.
4.
Attach power cords to outlet.
4.
Remove all cables from devices.
5.
Turn device ON.
Statement 2
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has a
module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type
made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if
not properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
•
Throw or immerse into water
•
Heat to more than 100° C (212° F)
•
Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
•
Statement 3
CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD-ROM drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
•
Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts
inside the device.
•
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
DANGER: Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following:
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the
beam.
•
Statement 4
Related service information
185
≥18 kg (37 lbs)
≥32 kg (70.5 lbs)
≥55 kg (121.2 lbs)
CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.
•
Statement 5
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply
do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might
have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current from the device,
ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source.
2
1
•
Statement 10
CAUTION:
Do not place any object weighing more than 82 kg (180 lbs.) on top of rack-mounted
devices.
186
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Importante:
Todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo da IBM documentation começam com um
número. Este número é utilizado para fazer referência cruzada de uma instrução de
cuidado ou perigo no idioma inglês com as versões traduzidas das instruções de
cuidado ou perigo encontradas nesta seção.
Por exemplo, se uma instrução de cuidado é iniciada com o número 1, as traduções
para aquela instrução de cuidado aparecem nesta seção sob a instrução 1.
Certifique-se de ler todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo antes de executar
qualquer operação.
Instrução 1
PERIGO
A corrente elétrica proveniente de cabos de alimentação, de telefone e de
comunicações é perigosa.
Para evitar risco de choque:
•
Não conecte ou desconecte cabos e não realize instalação, manutenção ou
reconfiguração deste produto durante uma tempestade com raios.
•
Conecte todos os cabos de alimentação a tomadas elétricas corretamente
instaladas e aterradas.
•
Conecte todos os equipamentos ao qual esse produto será conectado a tomadas
corretamente instaladas.
•
Sempre que possível, utilize apenas uma das mãos para conectar ou desconectar
cabos de sinal.
•
Nunca ligue qualquer equipamento quando existir evidência de danos por fogo,
água ou na estrutura.
•
Desconecte cabos de alimentação, sistemas de telecomunicação, redes e modems
antes de abrir as tampas dos dispositivos, a menos que especificado de maneira
diferente nos procedimentos de instalação e configuração.
•
Conecte e desconecte cabos conforme descrito na seguinte tabela, ao instalar ou
movimentar este produto ou os dispositivos conectados, ou ao abrir suas tampas.
Para Conectar:
Para Desconectar:
1.
DESLIGUE Tudo.
1.
DESLIGUE Tudo.
2.
Primeiramente, conecte todos os cabos
aos dispositivos.
2.
Primeiramente, remova os cabos de
alimentação das tomadas.
3.
Conecte os cabos de sinal aos
conectores.
3.
Remova os cabos de sinal dos conectores.
4.
Remova todos os cabos dos dispositivos.
4.
Conecte os cabos de alimentação às
tomadas.
5.
LIGUE os dispositivos.
Related service information
187
Instrução 2
CUIDADO:
Ao substituir a bateria de lítio, utilize apenas uma bateria IBM, Número de Peça
33F8354 ou uma bateria de tipo equivalente, recomendada pelo fabricante. Se o seu
sistema possui um móídulo com uma bateria de lítio, substitua-o apenas pelo mesmo
tipo de mídulo, do mesmo fabricante. A bateria contém lítio e pode explodir se não for
utilizada, manuseada e descartada de maneira correta.
Não:
•
Jogue ou coloque na água
•
Aqueça a mais de 100°C (212°F)
•
Conserte nem desmonte
Para descartar a bateria, entre em contato com a área de atendimento a clientes IBM,
pelo telefone (011) 889-8986, para obter informações sobre como enviar a bateria pelo
correio para a IBM.
Instrução 3
PRECAUCIÓN:
Quando produtos a laser (unidades de CD-ROM, unidades de DVD, dispositivos de
fibra ítica, transmissores, etc.) estiverem instalados, observe o seguinte:
•
Não remova as tampas. A remoção das tampas de um produto a laser pode
resultar em exposição prejudicial à radiação de laser. Nenhuma peça localizada
no interior do dispositivo pode ser consertada.
•
A utilização de controles ou ajustes ou a execução de procedimentos diferentes
dos especificados aqui pode resultar em exposição prejudicial à radiação.
PERIGO
Alguns produtos a laser contêm um diodo laser da Classe 3A ou Classe 3B embutido.
Observe o seguinte:
Radiação de laser quando aberto. Não olhe diretamente para o raio a olho nu ou com
instrumentos íticos, e evite exposição direta ao raio.
Instrução 4
188
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
≥18 kg (37 lbs)
≥32 kg (70,5 lbs)
≥55 kg (121,2 lbs)
CUIDADO:
Ao levantar a máquina, faça-o com segurança.
Instrução 5
CUIDADO:
Os botões Liga/Desliga localizados no dispositivo e na fonte de alimentação não
desligam a corrente elétrica fornecida ao dispositivo. O dispositivo também pode ter
mais de um cabo de alimentação. Para remover toda a corrente elétrica do dispositivo,
assegure que todos os cabos de alimentação estejam desconectados da fonte de
energia elétrica.
2
1
CUIDADO:
Instrução 10
CUIDADO:
Não coloque nenhum objeto com peso superior a 82 kg (180 lbs.) sobre dispositivos
montados em rack.
Related service information
189
190
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Related service information
191
192
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Related service information
193
194
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Related service information
195
196
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Related service information
197
Important:
Toutes les consignes Attention et Danger indiquées dans la bibliothèque IBM
documentation sont précédées d'un numéro. Ce dernier permet de mettre en
correspondance la consigne en anglais avec ses versions traduites dans la présente
section.
Par exemple, si une consigne de type Attention est précédée du chiffre 1, ses
traductions sont également précédées du chiffre 1 dans la présente section.
Prenez connaissance de toutes les consignes de type Attention et Danger avant de
procéder aux opérations décrites par les instructions.
Notice n° 1
DANGER
Le courant électrique passant dans les câbles de communication, ou les cordons
téléphoniques et d'alimentation peut être dangereux.
Pour éviter tout risque de choc électrique:
198
•
Ne manipulez aucun câble et n'effectuez aucune opération d'installation,
d'entretien ou de reconfiguration de ce produit au cours d'un orage.
•
Branchez tous les cordons d'alimentation sur un socle de prise de courant
correctement câblé et mis à la terre.
•
Branchez sur des socles de prise de courant correctement câblés tout équipement
connecté à ce produit.
•
Lorsque cela est possible, n'utilisez qu'une seule main pour connecter ou
déconnecter les câbles d'interface.
•
Ne mettez jamais un équipement sous tension en cas d'incendie ou d'inondation,
ou en présence de dommages matériels.
•
Avant de retirer les carters de l'unité, mettez celle-ci hors tension et déconnectez
ses cordons d'alimentation, ainsi que les câbles qui la relient aux réseaux, aux
systèmes de télécommunication et aux modems (sauf instruction contraire
mentionnée dans les procédures d'installation et de configuration).
•
Lorsque vous installez ou que vous déplacez le présent produit ou des
périphériques qui lui sont raccordés, reportez-vous aux instructions ci-dessous
pour connecter et déconnecter les différents cordons.
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Connexion
Déconnexion
1.
Mettez les unités hors tension.
1.
Mettez les unités hors tension.
2.
Commencez par brancher tous les
cordons sur les unités.
2.
Débranchez les cordons d'alimentation
des prises.
3.
Branchez les câbles d'interface sur des
connecteurs.
3.
Débranchez les câbles d'interface des
connecteurs.
4.
Branchez les cordons d'alimentation sur
des prises.
4.
Débranchez tous les câbles des unités.
5.
Mettez les unités sous tension.
Notice n° 2
ATTENTION:
Remplacez la pile au lithium usagée par une pile de référence identique
exclusivement - voir la référence IBM - ou par une pile équivalente recommandée
par le fabricant. Si votre système est doté d'un module contenant une pile au
lithium, vous devez le remplacer uniquement par un module identique, produit
par le même fabricant. La pile contient du lithium et présente donc un risque
d'explosion en cas de mauvaise manipulation ou utilisation.
•
Ne la jetez pas à l'eau.
•
Ne l'exposez pas à une température supérieure à 100 ° C.
•
Ne cherchez pas à la réparer ou à la démonter.
Pour la mise au rebut, reportez-vous à la réglementation en vigueur.
Notice n° 3
ATTENTION:
Si des produits laser sont installés (tels que des unités de CD-ROM ou de DVD,
des périphériques contenant des fibres optiques ou des émetteurs-récepteurs),
prenez connaissance des informations suivantes:
•
N'ouvrez pas ces produits pour éviter une exposition directe au rayon laser.
Vous ne pouvez effectuer aucune opération de maintenance à l'intérieur.
•
Pour éviter tout risque d'exposition au rayon laser, respectez les consignes de
réglage et d'utilisation des commandes, ainsi que les procédures décrites dans
le présent document.
DANGER
Related service information
199
Certains produits laser contiennent une diode laser de classe 3A ou 3B. Prenez
connaissance des informations suivantes:
Rayonnement laser lorsque le carter est ouvert. évitez de regarder fixement le
faisceau ou de l'observer à l'aide d'instruments optiques. évitez une exposition
directe au rayon.
Notice n° 4
≥18 kg
≥32 kg
≥55 kg
ATTENTION:
Faites-vous aider pour soulever ce produit.
Notice n° 5
ATTENTION:
Le bouton de mise sous tension/hors tension de l'unité et l'interrupteur
d'alimentation du bloc d'alimentation ne coupent pas l'arrivée de courant
électrique à l'intérieur de la machine. Il se peut que votre unité dispose de
plusieurs cordons d'alimentation. Pour isoler totalement l'unité du réseau
électrique, débranchez tous les cordons d'alimentation des socles de prise de
courant.
2
1
Notice n° 10
200
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
ATTENTION:
Ne posez pas d'objet dont le poids dépasse 82 kg sur les unités montées en armoire.
Related service information
201
Wichtig:
Alle Sicherheitshinweise in dieser IBM documentation beginnen mit einer Nummer.
Diese Nummer verweist auf einen englischen Sicherheitshinweis mit den übersetzten
Versionen dieses Hinweises in diesem Abschnitt.
Wenn z. B. ein Sicherheitshinweis mit der Nummer 1 beginnt, so erscheint die
übersetzung für diesen Sicherheitshinweis in diesem Abschnitt unter dem Hinweis 1.
Lesen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise, bevor Sie eine Anweisung ausführen.
Hinweis 1
VORSICHT
Elektrische Spannungen von Netz-, Telefon- und Datenübertragungsleitungen sind
gefährlich.
Aus Sicherheitsgründen:
•
Bei Gewitter an diesem Gerät keine Kabel anschließen oder lösen. Ferner keine
Installations-, Wartungs- oder Rekonfigurationsarbeiten durchführen.
•
Gerät nur an eine Schutzkontaktsteckdose mit ordnungsgemäß geerdetem
Schutzkontakt anschließen.
•
Alle angeschlossenen Geräte ebenfalls an Schutzkontaktsteckdosen mit
ordnungsgemäß geerdetem Schutzkontakt anschließen.
•
Signalkabel möglichst einhändig anschließen oder lösen.
•
Keine Geräte einschalten, wenn die Gefahr einer Beschädigung durch Feuer,
Wasser oder andere Einflüsse besteht.
•
Die Verbindung zu den angeschlossenen Netzkabeln,
Telekommunikationssystemen, Netzwerken und Modems ist vor dem öffnen des
Gehäuses zu unterbrechen. Es sei denn, dies ist in den zugehörigen Installationsund Konfigurationsprozeduren anders angegeben.
•
Nur nach den nachfolgend aufgeführten Anweisungen arbeiten, die für
Installation, Transport oder öffnen von Gehäusen von Personal Computern oder
angeschlossenen Einheiten gelten.
Kabel anschlieβen:
1.
Alle Geräte ausschalten und
Netzstecker ziehen.
2.
Zuerst alle Kabel an Einheiten
anschließen.
3.
Signalkabel an Anschlußbuchsen
anschließen.
4.
Netzstecker an Steckdose anschließen.
5.
Gerät einschalten.
Hinweis 2
202
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Kabel lösen:
1.
Alle Geräte ausschalten.
2.
Zuerst Netzstecker von Steckdose lösen.
3.
Signalkabel von Anschlußbuchsen lösen.
4.
Alle Kabel von Einheiten lösen.
ACHTUNG:
Eine verbrauchte Batterie nur durch eine Batterie mit der IBM Teilenummer 33F8354
oder durch eine vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterie ersetzen. Wenn Ihr System ein
Modul mit einer Lithium-Batterie enthält, ersetzen Sie es immer mit dem selben
Modultyp vom selben Hersteller. Die Batterie enthält Lithium und kann bei
unsachgemäßer Verwendung, Handhabung oder Entsorgung explodieren.
Die Batterie nicht:
•
mit Wasser in Berührung bringen.
•
über 100 C erhitzen.
•
reparieren oder zerlegen.
Die örtlichen Bestimmungen für die Entsorgung von Sondermüll beachten.
Hinweis 3
ACHTUNG:
Wenn ein Laserprodukt (z. B. CD-ROM-Laufwerke, DVD-Laufwerke, Einheiten mit
Glasfaserkabeln oder Transmitter) installiert ist, beachten Sie folgendes.
•
Das Entfernen der Abdeckungen des CD-ROM-Laufwerks kann zu gefährlicher
Laserstrahlung führen. Es befinden sich keine Teile innerhalb des CD-ROMLaufwerks, die vom Benutzer gewartet werden müssen. Die Verkleidung des CDROM-Laufwerks nicht öffnen.
•
Steuer- und Einstellelemente sowie Verfahren nur entsprechend den
Anweisungen im vorliegenden Handbuch einsetzen. Andernfalls kann
gefährliche Laserstrahlung auftreten.
VORSICHT
Manche CD-ROM-Laufwerke enthalten eine eingebaute Laserdiode der Klasse 3A
oder 3B. Die nachfolgend aufgeführten Punkte beachten.
Laserstrahlung bei geöffneter Tür. Niemals direkt in den Laserstrahl sehen, nicht
direkt mit optischen Instrumenten betrachten und den Strahlungsbereich meiden.
Hinweis 4
Related service information
203
≥18 kg
≥32 kg
≥55 kg
ACHTUNG:
Beim Anheben der Maschine die vorgeschriebenen Sicherheitsbestimmungen
beachten.
Hinweis 5
ACHTUNG:
Mit dem Betriebsspannungsschalter an der Vorderseite des Servers und dem
Betriebsspannungsschalter am Netzteil wird die Stromversorgung für den Server
nicht unterbrochen. Der Server könnte auch mehr als ein Netzkabel aufweisen. Um
die gesamte Stromversorgung des Servers auszuschalten, muß sichergestellt werden,
daß alle Netzkabel aus den Netzsteckdosen herausgezogen wurden.
2
1
Hinweis 10
ACHTUNG:
Keine Gegenstände, die mehr als 82 kg wiegen, auf Rack-Einheiten ablegen.
204
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Importante:
Tutti gli avvisi di attenzione e di pericolo riportati nella pubblicazione IBM
documentation iniziano con un numero. Questo numero viene utilizzato per
confrontare avvisi di attenzione o di pericolo in inglese con le versioni tradotte
riportate in questa sezione.
Ad esempio, se un avviso di attenzione inizia con il numero 1, la relativa versione
tradotta è presente in questa sezione con la stessa numerazione.
Prima di eseguire una qualsiasi istruzione, accertarsi di leggere tutti gli avvisi di
attenzione e di pericolo.
Avviso 1
PERICOLO
La corrente elettrica circolante nei cavi di alimentazione, del telefono e di segnale è
pericolosa.
Per evitare il pericolo di scosse elettriche:
•
Non collegare o scollegare i cavi, non effettuare l'installazione, la manutenzione o
la riconfigurazione di questo prodotto durante i temporali.
•
Collegare tutti i cavi di alimentazione ad una presa elettrica correttamente cablata
e munita di terra di sicurezza.
•
Collegare qualsiasi apparecchiatura collegata a questo prodotto ad una presa
elettrica correttamente cablata e munita di terra di sicurezza.
•
Quando possibile, collegare o scollegare i cavi di segnale con una sola mano.
•
Non accendere qualsiasi apparecchiatura in presenza di fuoco, acqua o se sono
presenti danni all'apparecchiatura stessa.
•
Scollegare i cavi di alimentazione, i sistemi di telecomunicazioni, le reti e i modem
prima di aprire i coperchi delle unità, se non diversamente indicato nelle
procedure di installazione e configurazione.
•
Collegare e scollegare i cavi come descritto nella seguente tabella quando si
effettuano l'installazione, la rimozione o l'apertura dei coperchi di questo
prodotto o
delle unità collegate.
Per collegare:
Per scollegare:
1.
SPEGNERE tutti i dispositivi.
1.
SPEGNERE tutti i dispositivi.
2.
Collegare prima tutti i cavi alle unità.
2.
3.
Collegare i cavi di segnale ai connettori.
Rimuovere prima i cavi di alimentazione
dalle prese elettriche.
4.
Collegare i cavi di alimentazione alle
prese elettriche.
3.
Rimuovere i cavi di segnale dai
connettori.
5.
ACCENDERE le unità.
4.
Rimuovere tutti i cavi dalle unità.
Avviso 2
Related service information
205
ATTENZIONE:
Quando si sostituisce la batteria al litio, utilizzare solo una batteria IBM con numero
parte 33F8354 o batterie dello stesso tipo o di tipo equivalente consigliate dal
produttore. Se il sistema di cui si dispone è provvisto di un modulo contenente una
batteria al litio, sostituire tale batteria solo con un tipo di modulo uguale a quello
fornito dal produttore. La batteria contiene litio e può esplodere se utilizzata,
maneggiata o smaltita impropriamente.
Evitare di:
•
Gettarla o immergerla in acqua
•
Riscaldarla ad una temperatura superiore ai 100°C
•
Cercare di ripararla o smontarla
Smaltire secondo la normativa in vigore (D.Lgs 22 del 5/2/9) e successive
disposizioni nazionali e locali.
Avviso 3
ATTENZIONE:
Quando si installano prodotti laser come, ad esempio, le unità DVD, CD-ROM, a fibre
ottiche o trasmettitori, prestare attenzione a quanto segue:
•
Non rimuovere i coperchi. L'apertura dei coperchi di prodotti laser può
determinare l'esposizione a radiazioni laser pericolose. All'interno delle unità non
vi sono parti su cui effettuare l'assistenza tecnica.
•
L'utilizzo di controlli, regolazioni o l'esecuzione di procedure non descritti nel
presente manuale possono provocare l'esposizione a radiazioni pericolose.
PERICOLO
Alcuni prodotti laser contengono all'interno un diodo laser di Classe 3A o Classe 3B.
Prestare attenzione a quanto segue:
Aprendo l'unità vengono emesse radiazioni laser. Non fissare il fascio, non guardarlo
direttamente con strumenti ottici ed evitare l'esposizione diretta al fascio.
Avviso 4
206
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
≥18 kg
≥32 kg
≥55 kg
ATTENZIONE:
Durante il sollevamento della macchina seguire delle norme di sicurezza.
Avviso 5
ATTENZIONE:
Il pulsante del controllo dell'alimentazione situato sull'unità e l'interruttore di
alimentazione posto sull'alimentatore non disattiva la corrente elettrica fornita
all'unità. L'unità potrebbe disporre di più di un cavo di alimentazione. Per disattivare
la corrente elettrica dall'unità, accertarsi che tutti i cavi di alimentazione siano
scollegati dalla sorgente di alimentazione.
2
1
Avviso 10
ATTENZIONE:
Non poggiare oggetti che pesano più di 82 kg sulla parte superiore delle unità
montate in rack.
Related service information
207
208
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Related service information
209
210
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Importante:
Todas las declaraciones de precauciín de esta IBM documentation empiezan con un
número. Dicho número se emplea para establecer una referencia cruzada de una
declaraciín de precauciín o peligro en inglés con las versiones traducidas que de
dichas declaraciones pueden encontrarse en esta secciín.
Por ejemplo, si una declaraciín de peligro empieza con el número 1, las traducciones
de esta declaraciín de precauciín aparecen en esta secciín bajo Declaraciín 1.
Lea atentamente todas las declaraciones de precauciín y peligro antes de llevar a cabo
cualquier operaciín.
Declaración 1
PELIGRO
La corriente eléctrica de los cables telefínicos, de alimentaciín y de comunicaciones es
perjudicial.
Para evitar una descarga eléctrica:
•
No conecte ni desconecte ningún cable ni realice las operaciones de instalaciín,
mantenimiento o reconfiguraciín de este producto durante una tormenta.
•
Conecte cada cable de alimentaciín a una toma de alimentaciín eléctrica con
conexiín a tierra y cableado correctos.
•
Conecte a tomas de alimentaciín con un cableado correcto cualquier equipo que
vaya a estar conectado a este producto.
•
Si es posible, utilice una sola mano cuando conecte o desconecte los cables de
sent.al.
•
No encienda nunca un equipo cuando haya riesgos de incendio, de inundaciín o
de daños estructurales.
•
Desconecte los cables de alimentaciín, sistemas de telecomunicaciones, redes y
mídems conectados antes de abrir las cubiertas del dispositivo a menos que se
indique lo contrario en los procedimientos de instalaciín y configuraciín.
•
Conecte y desconecte los cables tal como se describe en la tabla siguiente cuando
desee realizar una operaciín de instalaciín, de traslado o de apertura de las
cubiertas para este producto o para los dispositivos conectados.
Para la conexin
Para la desconexiín
1.
APÁGUELO todo.
1.
APÁGUELO todo.
2.
En primer lugar, conecte los cables a los
dispositivos.
2.
En primer lugar, retire cada cable de
alimentaciín de la toma de alimentaciín.
3.
Conecte los cables de señal a los
conectores.
3.
Retire los cables de señal de los
conectores.
4.
Conecte cada cable de alimentaciín a la
toma de alimentaciín.
4.
Retire los cables de los dispositivos.
5.
ENCIENDA el dispositivo.
Related service information
211
Declaración 2
PRECAUCIÓN:
Cuando desee sustituir la batería de litio, utilice únicamente el número de pieza
33F8354 de IBM o cualquier tipo de batería equivalente que recomiende el fabricante.
Si el sistema tiene un mídulo que contiene una batería de litio, sustitúyalo únicamente
por el mismo tipo de mídulo, que ha de estar creado por el mismo fabricante. La
batería contiene litio y puede explotar si el usuario no la utiliza ni la maneja de forma
adecuada o si no se desprende de la misma como corresponde.
No realice las acciones siguientes:
•
Arrojarla al agua o sumergirla
•
Calentarla a una temperatura que supere los 100°C (212°F)
•
Repararla o desmontarla
Despréndase de la batería siguiendo los requisitos que exija el reglamento o la
legislaciín local.
Declaración 3
PRECAUCIÓN:
Cuando instale productos láser (como, por ejemplo, CD-ROM, unidades DVD,
dispositivos de fibra íptica o transmisores), tenga en cuenta las advertencias
siguientes:
•
No retire las cubiertas. Si retira las cubiertas del producto láser, puede quedar
expuesto a radiaciín láser perjudicial. Dentro del dispositivo no existe ninguna
pieza que requiera mantenimiento.
•
El uso de controles o ajustes o la realizaciín de procedimientos que no sean los que
se han especificado aquí pueden dar como resultado una exposiciín perjudicial a
las radiaciones.
PELIGRO
Algunos productos láser contienen un diodo de láser incorporado de Clase 3A o de
Clase 3B. Tenga en cuenta la advertencia siguiente.
Cuando se abre, hay radiaciín láser. No mire fijamente el rayo ni lleve a cabo ningún
examen directamente con instrumentos ípticos; evite la exposiciín directa al rayo.
Declaración 4
212
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
≥18 kg (37 libras)
≥32 kg (70,5 libras)
≥55 kg (121,2 libras)
PRECAUCIÓN:
Tome medidas de seguridad al levantar el producto.
Declaración 5
PRECAUCIÓN:
El botín de control de alimentaciín del dispositivo y el interruptor de alimentaciín de
la fuente de alimentaciín no apagan la corriente eléctrica suministrada al dispositivo.
Es posible también que el dispositivo tenga más de un cable de alimentaciín. Para
eliminar la corriente eléctrica del dispositivo, asegúrese de desconectar todos los
cables de alimentaciín de la fuente de alimentaciín.
2
1
Declaración 10
PRECAUCIÓN:
No coloque ningún objeto que pese más de 82 kg (180 libras) encima de los
dispositivos montados en bastidor.
Related service information
213
Send us your comments!
We want to know your opinion about this manual (part number 24P2909). Your input
will help us to improve our publications.
Please photocopy this survey, complete it, and then fax it to IBM HMM Survey at
919-543-8167 (USA).
Name: _________________________________________
Phone number: __________________________________
1.
Do you like this manual?
❑ Yes
❑ No
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
2.
What would you like to see added, changed, or deleted in this manual?
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
3.
What is your service experience level?
❑ Less than five years
❑ More than five years
4.
Which servers do you service most?
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Thank you for your response!
214
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
Problem determination tips
Due to the variety of hardware and software combinations that can be encountered,
use the following information to assist you in problem determination. If possible,
have this information available when requesting assistance from Service Support and
Engineering functions.
•
Machine type and model
•
Processor or hard disk upgrades
•
Failure symptom
— Do diagnostics fail?
— What, when, where, single, or multiple systems?
— Is the failure repeatable?
— Has this configuration ever worked?
— If it has been working, what changes were made prior to it failing?
— Is this the original reported failure?
•
Reference/Diagnostics version
— Type and version level
•
Hardware configuration
— Print (print screen) configuration currently in use
— BIOS level
•
Operating system software
— Type and version level
Note: To eliminate confusion, identical systems are considered identical only if they:
1.
Are the exact machine type and models
2.
Have the same BIOS level
3.
Have the same adapters/attachments in the same locations
4.
Have the same address jumpers/terminators/cabling
5.
Have the same software versions and levels
6.
Have the same Reference/Diagnostics Diskette (version)
7.
Have the same configuration options set in the system
8.
Have the same setup for the operation system control files
Comparing the configuration and software set-up between "working and nonworking" systems will often lead to problem resolution.
Notices
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply
that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any
reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that
only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Subject to IBM’s valid
intellectual property or other legally protectable rights, any functionally equivalent
product, program, or service may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or
Related service information
215
service. The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other
products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the responsibility of the user.
IBM makes no representations or warranties regarding non-IBM products. For nonIBM software, third-party software licenses may apply.
GHz, MHz only measures microprocessor internal clock speed, not application
performance. Many factors affect application performance.
When referring to hard disk drive capacity, GB equals one bilion bytes. Total useraccessible capacity may vary depending on operating environments.
IBM makes no warranties, express or implied, regarding non-IBM products and
services that are ServerProven, including but not limited to the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for particular purpose. These products are offered and
warranted solely by third parties.
Trademarks
The following items are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or
other countries or both:
IBM
SystemXtra
NetBAY
ServeRAID
ThinkPad
ServerGuide
ServerProven
Light Path Diagnostics
Predictive Failure Analysis
Wake on LAN
Alert on LAN
xSeries
TechConnect
Active PCI
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:
Lotus and Lotus Notes are trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation.
Intel, Pentium, MMX and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation.
UNIX is a trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
216
Hardware Maintenance Manual: xSeries 250
[email protected]
Part Number:
File Number:
24P2909
Printed in the United States of America
on recycled paper containing 10%
recovered post-consumer fiber.
24P2909
0424P2909
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement